JP2018175402A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine comprising second determination means for executing a second determination based on ball entry to ball entry means, second display means for displaying a result of the second determination after executing a second performance in a second performance period when the second determination is executed by the second determination means, and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to a player when a fact that, the second determination is a specific result is displayed by the second display means, and further comprises prior determination means for determining in advance, a determination result determined by the first determination means based on information stored in the storage means, before establishment of the first determination condition, and variable setting means for setting the second performance period based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, is the state of the starting opening provided on the gaming board changed from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter? There is what performs the 1st lottery of no. In such a conventional type gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start winning for the starting opening, and a winning game advantageous to the player is executed when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery. As a result, attention is paid to both the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery, and the interest of the player is improved.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-325886

  However, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 stores up to a predetermined number of acquisition means for acquiring information based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. Storage means capable of performing the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the first determination means performing the first determination When the first determination is performed, the first determination is specified by the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination after performing the first effect in the first effect period, and the first display means The second determination is performed based on the ball entering means which makes it easy to enter the game ball when it is displayed as a result of the game, and that the game ball entered the ball entering means. A second determination is performed by the determination means and the second determination means In this case, after the second effect is executed in the second effect period, the second display means for displaying the result of the second determination and the display that the second determination is a specific result by the second display means And a bonus game execution unit for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player, and based on the information stored in the storage unit before the first determination condition is established. A predetermining means for determining in advance the determination result determined by the first determining means, and a variable setting for variably setting the second effect period based on the determination result determined by the predetermining means And means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, when the first determination is performed, the first presentation period is determined from the plurality of periods to determine one presentation period. A period setting means is provided, and the variable setting means is a first effect period corresponding to the first determination determined when the prior determination means determines that the first determination results in a specific result. The second effect period of the second effect being executed or executed is variably set based on the longest period that can be determined by the first effect period determination means so that the second effect period continues, at least until the end of the second effect. is there.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second effecting period is varied by the variable setting means when the second determination is the specific determination result. Have prohibition means for prohibiting

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to store up to a predetermined number of acquiring means for acquiring information and the information acquired by the acquiring means based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition. Storage means; first determination means for performing a first determination based on information stored in the storage means based on establishment of a first determination condition; and the first determination being performed by the first determination means And the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination after the first effect is executed in the first effect period, and the first determination is a specific result by the first display means And a second determination means for executing the second determination based on the ball entering means for facilitating the ball entry of the game ball, and the game ball entering the ball means. When the second determination by the second determination means is performed, the second effect After executing in the second effect period, the second display means for displaying the result of the second determination, and the player when it is displayed that the second determination is a specific result by the second display means A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the first game according to the information stored in the storage means before the first judgment condition is established; A prior determination means for determining in advance the determination result to be determined, and a variable setting means for variably setting the second effect period based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means is there. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the first determination is performed, the first effect period includes a first effect period determining unit that determines an effect period of 1 based on a plurality of periods, and the variable setting unit determines the advance determination The first effect period determining means is configured to continue until at least the first effect period corresponding to the determined first determination is ended when it is determined by the means that the first determination results in a specific result. The second effect period of the second effect being executed or to be executed is variably set based on the longest period which can be determined by the above. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect or the second aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, in the case where the second determination is the specific determination result, the variable setting means is configured to inhibit the second effect period from being varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the inside of a 2nd variable winning prize apparatus. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is a timing chart shown about the flow of the false change of the fusion pattern in the 3rd symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of ROM in a main control apparatus, (b) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main control apparatus. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first jackpot type selection table, and (c) is a schematic view It is the model which showed the content of the 2nd per random number table typically, and (d) is the model which showed the composition of the fluctuation pattern selection table typically. It is the model which showed the content of the small hit classification selection table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the small hitting scenario table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hitting scenario a, (c) is a small hitting scenario It is the model which showed the content of b typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a common drawing variation pattern selection table (normal), and (b) schematically shows the contents of a common drawing variation pattern selection table (time reduction · V) FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pseudo variation pattern selection table, (c) These are the block diagrams which showed the electric constitution of RAM in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol fluctuation processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is the flowchart which showed the through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of V passage performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit control processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit ending control processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting ending control processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation change start setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation change start setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the boot processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing jackpot opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the final round command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. (A) is a flowchart showing jackpot ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing small hit opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device It is. (A) is a flowchart showing small hitting ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V passing command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device It is. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation indicatory processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device . (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol fluctuation processing 2 which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed motor-operated part opening / closing processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the timing chart shown about the flow of the false change of the fusion design performed with the 3rd symbol display device in a 4th embodiment. It is the timing chart shown about the flow of the false change of the fusion design performed with the 3rd symbol display device in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of the display screen in the 3rd symbol display device in a 4th embodiment, and (b) is the display screen in the 3rd symbol display device in a 4th embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the fourth embodiment, (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment It is a block diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation change start setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation stop time pseudo fluctuation start setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the holding ball number command reception process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed fluctuation pattern selective processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation start time distinction processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection processing 2 which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation fluctuation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. Is a front view of the inside of the second variable winning device 650.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, there are a large number of nails, a first ball entry device 64 having a first ball entry port 64a, a first variable prize device 65 having a first specified prize port 65a, and a second specified prize port 650a. The game board 13 (see FIG. 2) provided with the second variable winning device 650 etc. is detachably mounted from the front side. A ball game is performed by the game ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 11) for launching a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a game ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a are guided to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16 It has become.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing game balls is formed in a substantially box shape extending forward and opening the upper surface, and prize balls, lending balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the gaming balls inserted into the upper tray 17 are guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination.

  Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and this pachinko machine 10 does not show “in the city stage”, “empty stage”, “island stage” Three stages of are provided. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects performed with the first ball entry 64a described later, that is, entry to the start winning entry (start winning) are matched to the theme given to each stage It is designed to be done. The stage change is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and whenever the frame button 22 is operated, for example, It is repeatedly changed in the order of sky stage "→" island stage "→" town stage "→ .... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach when the pseudo change effect is started. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the game ball is operated according to the operation. Loans will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In addition, the pachinko machine where the game ball is lent directly to the upper tray 17 from the ball lending device etc. without passing through the card unit, so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion 40 to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened at the central portion thereof. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player for driving the game ball to the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and inside the operation handle 51, driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. And a push button stop switch 51b for stopping the game ball from being released during the pressing operation, and a variable for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance A resistor (not shown) is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and thereby the ball is driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower front portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The game ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with the box (generally referred to as a "seven box" or "dollar box") for receiving gaming balls discharged from the lower plate 50 under the lower plate 50. To be done. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is made of a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, in addition to a large number of nails (only partially shown) for guiding balls and a windmill (not shown). The first variable winning device 65 having the rails 61 and 62, the first ball entry port 64a and the first specified winning hole 65a, the second variable winning device 650 having the second specified winning hole 650a, a normal symbol starting opening (through The gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The first ball entering device 64 having the first ball entry port 64a, the first variable winning device 65 having the first specified winning hole 65a, the second variable winning device 650 having the second specified winning hole 650a, the variable display device unit 80 Is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so as to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. Therefore, for example, by providing the movable movable object for decoration movable according to the game on the rear surface side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the movement of the movable character, so the range is limited. The game area being played can be used three-dimensionally, and it is possible to provide a player with various effects.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the ball. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 70 made of resin for connecting the rails (a prize opening etc. is provided and launched). Area where the game ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game balls fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the gaming ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once returns to the inside of the ball guiding passage. It is prevented. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flight portion of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 , The momentum is damped and bounced back to the central part side.

  The pachinko machine 10 has an open / close door that can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter the first ball entrance 64a and a closed state that prevents game balls from entering the first ball entrance 64a. A first ball entering device 64 is provided. The opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is formed of a rectangular outer shape, and is substantially in line with the outer periphery of the first ball entry port 64a, stands upright parallel to the game board 13 and faces the first ball entry port 64a. By being disposed, the game ball can be configured not to enter the first ball entrance 64a. The open / close door is pivotally supported at its lower end side, and is configured to rotate 90 degrees toward the front side of the game board 13 about the axis by operating (on) a solenoid not shown. ing. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 is received by the upper surface of the open / close door, and the received game ball is guided to the inside of the first ball entrance 64a. In addition, although the details will be described later, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the game ball passes through gate (normal symbol starting opening) 67. When it passes, the lottery of the normal design (the 2nd design) is done. Specifically, the open / close door of the first ball entering device 64 is always set in the closed state, and when it comes into contact with the normal symbol, it is opened in a predetermined opening pattern (opening period, opening number) Can be changed to When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, a lottery of special symbols is executed, and effects based on the lottery result are executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the drawing of the special symbol to be held for entering the first ball entrance 64a, it is determined whether the special symbol has won a big hit or a small hit, and the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit If it is determined that the jackpot is determined, the jackpot type or the small hitting type is also determined.

  When the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state (big hit game). Here, when the jackpot game is executed, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed (after the opening period has elapsed), the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 that is normally closed is set for a predetermined period It is released (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won), and the release is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Then, after the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses (ending period elapses), and the big hit game is ended.

  In addition, when one gaming ball is won in the first variable winning device 65, fifteen gaming balls are paid out to the player as a winning ball. In addition, a period (opening period) from when the big hit game is executed until the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (opening period), and the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) ) The period from the repetition to the end of the jackpot game (ending period), and the period (interval period) in which the specific door 65f is closed between the opening operation of the specific door 65f that is repeatedly performed, are appropriately set. do it.

  During the jackpot game, a large number of gaming balls (for example, about 150 balls (10 rounds x 15 rounds)) are won in the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, so a larger number of awards than usual Payout of balls (about 1500 pieces (100 pieces × 10 shots)) is performed.

  Details will be described later, but at the jackpot of the special symbol, one of the jackpot types is determined from the two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" (see FIG. 14 (b)), and the round set to jackpot type The specific door 65f is opened by the number of times (in the present embodiment, 15R (round)). In addition, after the end of the special gaming state, based on the jackpot type and the gaming state when you hit the jackpot, the time saving gaming state is a predetermined number of times for the player (for example, 3 times in the case of winning jackpot A in normal gaming state) ) Is given.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol executed for the passage of the game ball to the through gate (normal symbol starting opening) 67, the normality judgment of the normal symbol is performed. When the normal symbol (the second symbol) comes into contact, the open / close door of the first ball entry device 64 located below the through gate 67 is changed to the open state for a predetermined time (2 seconds in the present embodiment). The game ball can easily enter the ball entrance 64a. That is, when the normal symbol is hit, the gaming ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64a, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol can be easily performed.

  When the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83, and the predetermined time (for example, the selected variation time such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds) After the lapse, the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the gaming ball passes through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed in second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by first symbol display device 37 Be done. In the present embodiment, the variation display of the second symbol is executed not only in the second symbol display device 83 but also in the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the variation display of the second symbol display device 83. In the present embodiment, when passing through the through gate 67, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and may be configured not to be suspended or may be different from four times. .

  In addition, below the through gate 67, a clune member 660 is disposed to receive the game ball having passed through the through gate 67. The clune member is formed in a conical shape, and has at the top a ball entry portion into which the gaming ball having passed through the through gate 67 enters. In addition, in this ball entering part, the distance between the through gate 67 and the ball entering part is configured to be less than one game ball so that game balls other than those passing through the gate 67 will not enter. A spiral channel 660k is formed which allows the gaming ball having entered the ball to flow down spirally along the inner wall of the crew member 660, and the end of the spiral channel 660k is gently mortared to the center An inclined bottom portion 660t is formed. The spiral flow path 660k is configured to guide the gaming ball having entered the ball entry portion to spiral out along the inner peripheral surface of the bottom portion 660t to the outer end of the bottom portion 660t. It is done. The bottom surface portion 660t is identical to the bottom shape of the well-known Clune, and guides the gaming balls to the central portion gradually while circularly moving the gaming balls along the inner periphery of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom portion 660t, a ball outlet 660a slightly larger than the gaming ball (in this embodiment, 12 mm in diameter in the present embodiment) is configured to project downward in a cylindrical shape. Furthermore, inside the ball outlet 660a, a flow path is formed by a flow path wall that protrudes 0.5 mm in a spiral shape, and the gaming ball spirals inside the ball outlet 660a, and the ball outlet 660a outside Are configured to be discharged.

  In the present embodiment, only the gaming balls passing through the through gate 67 are passed through the clune member 660. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and gaming balls that have not passed through the through gate 67 can enter. It is good also as composition. By configuring in this manner, the frequency of entering the clown member 660 can be increased, and it is possible to more easily enter the first ball entry port 64a. Further, in the present embodiment, the spiral flow channel 660k is formed in the interior of the clune member 660. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the structure without the spiral flow channel 660k may be used. May be formed only by the spiral channel 660k. Further, instead of the spiral flow path 660k, a decelerating portion may be formed of a material or the like having a high coefficient of friction for decelerating the flow-down speed of the gaming ball. Any delay may be selected as long as it delays the flow of the game ball.

  As a result, the gaming ball having entered the ball entry portion of the clune member 660 slowly rolls along the inner peripheral wall of the clune member 660 in the spiral flow path 660 k and is guided to the bottom surface portion 660 t. The gaming balls guided to the bottom portion 660t are guided gradually to the ball outlet 660a while performing circular motion on the bottom portion 660t from the outer peripheral side to the center. The ball outlet 660a has a diameter slightly larger than that of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball rotates in a spiral in the ball outlet 660a projecting downward by the spiral flow path formed inside. While being discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 660a. Therefore, the game ball entered into the ball entry portion of the clune member 660 is configured to take about 10 seconds to be discharged from the ball outlet 660a. In addition, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the hit of a normal symbol is comprised in 10 seconds (refer FIG. 17 (a)), when it passes through gate 67 and a lottery result is a hit, Since the game ball entered from the ball outlet 660a of the clune member 660 is discharged at the timing when the fluctuation ends, the game ball is firstly matched with the timing when the open / close door of the first ball entry device 64 is opened. It can be made to flow down to the ball entry device 64. Therefore, even when the player has stopped firing the game ball, the game ball can be made to enter the first ball entrance 64a at the timing when the open / close door is in the open state. Further, below the ball outlet 660a, the game nail KG is disposed at a position facing the ball outlet 660a. As a result, the gaming balls discharged and flowing down from the ball outlet 660a can not flow directly to the first ball-loading device 64, and the flow-down speed is reduced by the game nail KG, and further distributed to the left and right. Therefore, since it is possible to delay the time until the game ball reaches the first ball entry device 64, it is possible to match the time lag until the open / close door is in the open state after the normal symbol is determined. The game ball can be more easily entered into the first entrance 64a.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the fluctuation | variation time of the hit fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol may be delayed by the clune member 660, it may be not only it but time, such as 5 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to delay, although the period is shorter than the fluctuation period of the winning.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of detachment (in the present embodiment, the probability 4/5 of detachment), a small hit different from the jackpot (in the present embodiment, 1/5 in the present embodiment) has a predetermined probability (in the present embodiment) It is set in small hits 1/4). When it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit, the determination of the small hit type is also performed. That is, when the special symbol becomes a small hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a specific gaming state (small hit game), and the opening / closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 closed normally is a predetermined period (for example, , Until one and a half seconds have passed, or one round until ten balls are won.

  As a result, a ball can enter the second specified winning opening 650 a of the second variable winning device 650. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 4, a V passage flow passage 650 e 3 is provided inside the above-described second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 4), and the ball is a V passage flow passage 650 e 3 When the V detection switch 650e5 (see FIG. 4) detects that the vehicle has passed (hereinafter, the specific area is referred to as passing), a jackpot game is provided.

  Although the details will be described later, when winning a small hit of a special symbol, with reference to the small hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 15), three types of "small hit A", "small hit B", "small hit C" One of the small hit types is selected. Then, the small hitting game is executed based on the selected small hitting type. In addition, although details will be described later, only the "small hit A" of the three types of small hit types, when the ball enters the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 as a result of the small hit game And the V passage passage 650 e 3 is set to be able to pass through. That is, only "small hit A" is set to be able to give a big hit as a result of the small hit game.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 wins a small hit by a game aiming at a big hit by drawing a special symbol (so-called one-type game) and a drawing by a special symbol, to the second variable winning device 650 by a small hit game. A game (so-called, 1 type 2 type mixing machine) equipped with a game (so-called, 2 type game) aiming at a big hit by passing a winning ball to a specific area (in this embodiment, the V detection switch 650e5) Have.

  By having such a playability, the player can aim for the jackpot at a plurality of occasions, so it is possible to alleviate the boredom in the game.

  Here, the second variable winning device 650 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 4A to 4B. The second variable winning device 650 is, as shown in FIG. 2, disposed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, and the firing handle 51 is such that the game ball passes the left side of the third symbol display device 81. When the game is performed by the operated game method (hereinafter referred to as left-handed game), the game ball easily wins the second specified winning opening 650a (the game ball passes the right side of the third symbol display device 81) As compared with the game method (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) in which the firing handle 51 is operated, it is configured. The second variable winning device 650 is disposed on the front side of the game board, and has a front cover body formed with a specific winning opening 650a for receiving game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13, and its front cover body. The opening and closing piece 650b which opens and closes the specific winning opening 650a, and the flow path where the game ball placed on the back side of the game board 13 and entered the specific winning opening 650a is formed. It mainly comprises the flow path member 650h. In the second variable winning device 650, a front cover body is fixed to the game board 13 with screws so as to cover the through holes obtained by processing the game board 13 by the router from the front side of the game board 13. In the front cover body, a second specified winning opening 650a is disposed as an opening where game balls flowing down the front side of the game board 13 can enter, and a closed state covering the second specified winning opening 650a As shown in FIG. 2, an open / close piece 650b is attached which can be changed to an open state for guiding the gaming ball to the second specified winning opening 650a. The opening and closing piece 650b is formed in a claw shape as shown in FIG. 2, and the tip end portion is tapered, and the other end side of the tip end portion is pivotally supported by the front cover body so as to be rotatable. There is. The side facing the second specified winning opening 650a of the opening and closing piece 650b is configured in a circular arc shape so as to guide the gaming ball to the second specified winning opening 650a when it is in the open state. The opening and closing piece 650 b is configured to be variably switched between the closed state and the open state by a solenoid disposed in the second variable winning device 650. The mechanism for varying the opening and closing piece 650b is already known, and thus the details thereof will be omitted.

  A part of the through hole is exposed and formed at the lower left of the front cover body, so that the back side of the game board 13 is flush with the front of the game board 13 by a transparent plastic member so as to be visible. Closed up. On the back side of this plastic member, a V passage flow path 650e3 and a V detection switch 650e5 to be described later are configured to be visible, and a V detection switch 650e5 (specific region) is disposed at a position corresponding to the V detection switch 650e5. The letter "V" is printed to indicate that it is As a result, it is possible to visually recognize and confirm whether the gaming ball in which the player entered the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, thereby further improving the interest of the game. it can.

  FIGS. 4A and 4B are diagrams showing a flow path member 650h disposed on the back side of the game board 13 in the second variable winning device 650. FIG. In FIG. 4A, the switching valve 650b3 is set so that the gaming ball entered into the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 can not pass (or is difficult to pass through the V passage flow path 650). Is a view showing a state in which it is rotated upward (the solenoid is not in operation). In FIG. 4B, the switching valve 650b3 has a solenoid facing downward so that the game ball entered into the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 can pass the V passage flow path 650e3. It is the figure which showed the state currently rotated by operate | moving.

  With reference to FIG. 4A, a flow path member 650h formed on the back side of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. The game ball that has won the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 rolls on the flow passage communicating with the through hole of the game board 13 formed inside the front cover body, and the back side of the game board 13 To roll. The flow path member 650h is fixed to the back side of the game board 13 with a screw so that the inflow port 650a1 of the flow path member 650h is disposed at a position facing the through hole. The flow path member 650 h forms a flow path through which a plurality of gaming balls can flow down by the wall portion projecting to the back side. The game ball having passed through the inflow port 650a1 is formed with a flow path so as to be distributed to either the discharge flow path 650e1 or the V passage flow path 650e3. A switching valve 650b3 is disposed at the butting portion between the discharge flow passage 650e1 and the V passage flow passage 650e3, and the game ball having passed through the inflow port 650a1 as the switching valve 650b3 rotates and operates is discharged from the flow passage 650e1 Or the V passage flow channel 650 e 3.

  The discharge flow channel 650e1 is an upper flow channel in the flow channel member 650h as shown in FIG. 4A, and is provided inside the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 forming the outer periphery of the flow channel member 650h and the flow channel member 650h. The inner wall 650f3 is formed on the back side with a width that allows one ball of the game ball to pass, at a position spaced by a width (15 mm in this embodiment) where the game ball can pass through the outer peripheral wall 650e7. It is done. An outer peripheral wall 650e7 is arranged below the inner wall 650f3 with an interval allowing passage of one or more game balls, and the V passage flow path 650e3 is formed by the inner wall 650f3 and the outer peripheral wall 650e7 arranged below the inner wall 650f3. Is formed. A partition wall 650f4 is provided to partition the discharge flow channel 650e1 from the V passage flow channel 650e3. The interval from the partition wall 650f4 to the inner wall portion 650f3 is configured to be less than one game ball so that the game ball can not pass through the upper part of the partition wall 650f4, and the flowed down ball reliably flows down to the V passage flow path 650e3. can do. The inner wall portion 650f3 is gently inclined downward to the left to the near position immediately below the inflow port 650a1 and has a width (allowing the passage of one game ball from the end to the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 disposed on the right) In this embodiment, it is formed with an interval of 15 mm. A switching valve 650b3 is disposed on the same upper surface as between the outer peripheral wall 650e7 and the end of the inner wall 650f3.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the switching valve 650b3 is formed in a plate shape having an upper surface through which one game ball can pass on the upper surface, and one end on the opposite side of the inner wall 65f3 is a channel member 650h Is rotatably fixed to the The shaft portion is connected to a link member operated by a solenoid (not shown), and when the solenoid is operated, the link member is rotated, and the switching valve 650b3 is within the range of the arrow shown in FIG. It is configured to rotate at. When the solenoid is inoperative, the switching valve 650b3 is biased and fixed at the position of the solid line shown in FIG. 4A, and is formed in the passage detection sensor 650as that can detect passage of the game ball. The game ball having passed through the inflow port 650a1 is received on the upper surface, and is rolled (guided) to the discharge flow path 650e1. The gaming ball having flowed down the discharge flow channel 650e1 is detected by the discharge detection switch 650e6 disposed at the end of the discharge flow channel 650e1 and is guided to the flow channel discharged to the outside of the gaming ball. In addition, the passage detection switch 650as in which the inflow port 650a1 which can pass a game ball is formed is arrange | positioned, and a game ball is detected by this passage detection switch 650as, The 2nd specification of the 2nd variable winning prize apparatus 650 It is detected that the game ball has entered the winning opening 650a, and based on that, the payout of the winning balls, the counting of the number of winnings, etc. are executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4B, when the solenoid is actuated and the switching valve 650b3 is turned downward, when the gaming ball having passed through the inflow port 650a1 flows downward, the V passage flow passage 650e3 Since the inlet to the valve is in an open state, it flows into the V passage channel 650 e 3. The V detection switch 650e5 described above is disposed at the end of the V passage flow path 650e3, and after being detected by the V detection switch 650e5, the game ball is guided to the flow path to be discharged to the outside.

  In the present embodiment, the execution of the small hitting game is started when the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a small hitting. The start of small hitting game, small hitting scenario a202g1 or small hitting scenario b202g2 (see the figure (a)-(c)) small hitting start setting processing which the MPU201 of main control 110 executes (S402 or S403 in Figure 27) By setting in the small hit control process (S1005 in FIG. 36) in the main process (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, it is determined that the setting of the small hit scenario a202g1 or b202g2 is present ( It is started by S1301 of FIG. 36: Yes). The point at which the symbol indicating the small hit is determined and stopped, and the determined period (1s in this embodiment) which is a period for determining and stopping the symbol can be defined as the start of the small hit game.

  First, as common to the small hitting scenario a202g1 and the small hitting scenario b202g2, after 1.5 seconds from the start of execution of the small hitting game, the switching valve 650b3 is turned downward and the gaming ball can pass to the V passage flow passage 650e3 Set to Thereafter, 4 seconds after the start of the small hitting game, the solenoid is deactivated and turned upward, and the gaming ball can not flow into the V passage flow path 650 e 3 (variable). On the other hand, the operation (opening) timing of the opening and closing piece 650b set to a state where the game ball can enter the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650, small hit type (ie small hit scenario It is set variably depending on whether a202g1 is set or small hitting scenario b202g2 is set. Specifically, if the small hitting type is the small hitting A (small hitting type in which the small hitting scenario a202g1 is set), as shown in FIG. 16 (b), 1.5 seconds after the start of the small hitting game It is opened and then closed 3 seconds after the start of the small hit game. On the other hand, if the small hitting type is small hitting B and small hitting C (small hitting type where small hitting scenario b202g2 is set), it is opened 4 seconds after the start of the small hitting game, and then, from the start of the small hitting game It is closed after 5.5 seconds. By configuring in this way, if the small hitting A, the opening and closing piece 650b will be in the open state during the period when the gaming ball can flow into the V passage flow passage 650e3, the gaming ball to the V passage passage 650e3 The game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650 e 5 and it is possible to give a jackpot game to the player. On the other hand, in small hits B and C, as shown in FIG. 16C, since the opening and closing pieces 650b do not open during the period when the gaming ball can flow down to the V passage channel 650e3, the valve passage 650e3 is The gaming balls can not flow in, and all gaming balls that entered the second specified winning opening 650a are guided to the discharge flow path 650e1. That is, the small hit A is a small hit that can detect the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5, and the small hit B and the small hit C are not detected by the V detection switch 650e5. It is set to possible (hard) small hit.

  As described above, since it is possible to control whether or not the V detection switch 650e is detected by the small hitting type, the small hitting (in the present embodiment, the small hitting A) in which the jackpot is awarded to the player is given. It is possible to set the small hits (in the present embodiment, the small hits B and C) according to the small hits type. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the probability (frequency) that the big hit is given by adjusting the selection ratio in the small hitting type or adjusting the determination probability of the small hitting. Therefore, the player can be expected to have not only the judgment of the jackpot in the special symbol but also the judgment of the small hit. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the player from being bored.

  The game ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 is detected by the passage detection switch 650as disposed at the inflow port 650a1, and the ball flowing down the V passage flow passage 650e3 is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, The ball which has flowed down the discharge flow path 650e1 is detected by the discharge detection switch 650e6. Thus, the total number of winning game balls (the total number of gaming balls detected by the passage detection switch 650as of the inflow port 650a1) and the total number of gaming balls discharged (V detection switch 650e5, discharge detection switch 650e6 detected games) By making it possible to detect the total number of balls), it is possible to monitor whether or not the winning game balls have been discharged within a predetermined time. It is possible to easily find an illegal act of intentionally leaving the game ball in the second variable winning device 650.

  The following detection sensors may be provided in the second variable winning device 650. For example, a switch capable of detecting the position of the switching valve 650b3 may be provided. By providing such a switch, it is possible to easily detect a failure of the switching valve 650b3.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A first symbol display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed on the upper right side of the game area (the upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate.

  The first symbol display device 37 uses LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a short time or in the normal state by lighting, or indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating or not by lighting, and the stop symbol corresponds to a large hit 7 indicates whether the symbol corresponds to a small symbol, a symbol corresponding to a small hit, or an out symbol by a lighting state, indicates a type of a large hitting or a type of a small hitting by a lighting state, and indicates the number of holding balls by a lighting state; The segment display device displays the number of rounds in the big hit and an error display. The plurality of LEDs are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors notifies various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. Is configured.

  Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the game ball passes through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 is triggered by the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol). Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the normal symbol, the normal symbol (in the present embodiment, for example, “○ ×” displayed in the normal symbol display area Ds1 shown in FIG. 5) The fluctuation display of the common figure auxiliary symbol) is executed.

  Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first ball entering device 64 is brought into the open state by the fact that the ball entering the first entrance 64a, which triggers the start of variation of the special symbol, is the normal symbol. Only when That is, in this embodiment, after passing through gate 67, the normal symbol starts to change, and after stopping by the hit symbol, the opening period of the first ball-in-hand device 64 (the normal symbol hitting game period) In the meantime, it becomes possible to enter the first ball entrance 64a. The variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 by using the first ball entrance 64a as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (in the present embodiment, the special symbol display shown in FIG. 5 (a) Variable display of the region Ds2 etc. is performed.

  In the present embodiment, a fused symbol in which the variations of the normal symbol and the special symbol are fused is variably displayed in the main symbol display area Dm (see FIG. 5A) of the third symbol display device 81. The main symbol display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 5A, is composed of a display area larger than the normal symbol display area Ds1 and the special symbol display area Ds2, and the player mainly views the fusion symbol. Is configured to execute a game. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the symbol of the normal symbol is hit, and the variation of the special symbol is not started until the ball enters the first entrance 64a, so the frequency of variation of the special symbol is a normal gaming machine ( The starting hole of the special symbol will be lower than the game machine configured to always enter the ball, but since the variation of the fused symbol is started when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the player Can get rid of boredom and get tired of games early. In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, not only the fused symbol, but also a dedicated symbol corresponding to the normal symbol and the special symbol (a common symbol auxiliary symbol displayed in the normal symbol display region Ds1, a special symbol display region Ds2 Since the special drawing auxiliary symbol displayed is also displayed), the variation condition of the normal symbol and the variation condition of the special symbol can be individually identified, and the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, the detail about a fusion symbol is mentioned later.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, and for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A row (fusion pattern) is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, a common drawing reserve number display area Ds3 is set below the display area of the third symbol display device 81. When the right to pass the through gate 67 and start the fluctuation of the normal symbol is reserved and stored in this common figure reserved number display area Ds3, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved items is shown in FIG. 5 (b). It is an area displayed with a black circle symbol. One "black circle symbol" is configured to be displayed for one reserved number.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 5-9, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. The fusion symbol displayed in the main symbol display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is configured by ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Each of the main designs is configured by attaching numerals “0” to “9” inside a decorated square-shaped decoration frame. Furthermore, at the lower end portion of the symbols in each symbol row, a left blink display portion DF1, a middle blink display portion DF2 and a right blink display portion DF3 which are blinked are formed, and the left blink display portion DF1 of the left symbol row The right blinking display portion DF3 of the right symbol row is configured to blink in correspondence with the normal change display of symbols. In this case, the middle blinking display portion DF2 of the middle symbol row has a decorative function which is displayed in a blinking manner in response to the variation of the middle symbol row. On the other hand, the left blinking display portion DF1 of the left symbol row, the middle blinking display portion DF2 of the middle symbol row, and the right blinking display portion DF3 of the right symbol row are configured to blink in correspondence with the out-of-round fluctuation display ing.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to notify the player of the variation of the special symbol and the variation of the normal symbol in the combined symbol by suppressing the discomfort. Therefore, the player can easily play a game by visually recognizing the fusion symbol, and can simplify and inform the player of complicated game characteristics.

  FIG.5 (b) is the figure which showed the state which the number of holding of a normal symbol is two, the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol and a special symbol is lose | eliminated, it stops by a symbol, and a fusion symbol is also stop-displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), the “○ ×” symbol is stopped and displayed when the normal symbol is removed. On the other hand, in the case of a normal symbol, the symbol "○○" (see FIG. 6 (b)) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fusion symbol, when the normal symbol is dislocated, the left blink display part DF1 and the right blink display part DF3 are stopped and displayed in the state of being kept off (refer to FIG. 5 (b)). .

  FIG. 6 (a) shows an example of the display mode in the third symbol display device 81 when the variation of the normal symbol is started by digesting the number of balls for general-purpose drawing suspension from the state of FIG. 5 (b) described above. FIG. When the variation of the normal symbol is started, the common drawing auxiliary symbol of the normal symbol display area Ds1 is variably displayed. The common-drawing auxiliary symbol is configured by a symbol row configured by "o" symbol and "x" symbol, and this symbol row is displayed in two rows in the normal symbol display area Ds1. When the variable display is started, the “o” symbol and the “x” symbol are repeatedly changed and displayed at high speed. In addition, when a "(circle)" symbol is displayed in alignment by each symbol row, it shows and shows the hit of a normal symbol.

  In synchronization with the start of the variation display of the normal symbols, each symbol row of the fused symbols of the main symbol display area Dm is also displayed by being changed and scrolled. When the scroll display of each symbol row is started, the blink display portions DF1 to DF3 of each fused symbol also start to blink.

  6 (b) is an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the variation time of the normal symbol has passed from the state of FIG. It is the figure shown about. In the normal symbol display area Ds1, the stop display is performed in a state in which "o" symbols indicating the hits of the normal symbols are aligned. The fused symbol is displayed in a reach display mode in which the symbol “7” is displayed in the left symbol row and the right symbol row, and the middle symbol row is scrolled. Furthermore, the left blinking display portion DF1 and the right blinking display portion DF3 of the "7" symbol of the reach symbol displayed in the left symbol row and the right symbol row are displayed while being kept lit. The middle blinking display portion DF2 of the middle symbol row is displayed in a blinking state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the fusion symbol also starts the variation display in synchronization with the variation display of the normal symbol. Furthermore, in accordance with the passage of the variation time (variation period) of the normal symbol, the fusion symbol is displayed in the reach display mode if the result of determination of the normal symbol is a hit. In this case, the left symbol row stops changing first, and the left blink display part DF1 turns on, and then, after a predetermined period (in time with the stop timing of the normal symbol), the right blink display part DF3 stops The right blink indicator DF3 is displayed in a lit state. As described above, the left blink display part DF1 and the right blink display part DF3 start fluctuating display in synchronization with the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the right blink display part DF3 of the right blink display part DF3 The blinking display is configured to end. Thereby, the player can distinguish the end of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by focusing attention on the right blinking display portion DF3.

  In addition, when the success or failure judgment result of the normal symbol is out, the fused symbol is configured to stop and display all symbol rows with the non-reached out symbol according to the passage of the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol. ing. In this case, the left symbol row is stopped first, and then the right symbol row and finally, the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed according to the variation stop timing of the normal symbol. In this case, each blinking display portion is also displayed in an unlit state and the blinking display is ended based on the timing at which the symbol row is stopped.

  In FIG. 7 (a), the normal symbol described above with reference to FIG. 6 (b) is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, and the motorized part (opening and closing door) of the first ball entry device 64 is operated to open and close It is the figure shown about an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display 81 when it becomes a hit game period of the normal symbol where a door will be in an opened state. When the hit game of the normal symbol is started, the fusion symbol displays the character "insert the gaming ball into the small attacker and reach the super reach entry" while maintaining the reach display mode, and the first ball entry device to the player A notification mode prompting the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64a of 64 is displayed. In this case, the fusion symbol is displayed in a reach display mode, and the state in which the middle symbol row scrolls at a low speed is maintained. In the present embodiment, at the timing when the normal symbol is hit, a notification prompting the player to cause the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64a is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. In the case of the above, notification may be performed from a predetermined number of seconds before (for example, 5 seconds before). In addition, a placement for performance (general winning opening (if you win a prize, pay one ball to the player)) is arranged, and the player makes a prize for the entry, the third symbol display device You may be comprised so that the production | presentation of the fusion symbol displayed by 81 may be changed. By doing this, the player can easily play the game by firing the game ball even during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol, so when the normal symbol is hit, the game is played on the first ball entrance 64a. It is possible to suppress the problem that the ball can not enter the ball.

  Furthermore, the opening period until the first ball entry opening 64a becomes open state is set long (for example, 10 seconds etc.) until it becomes a hit of an ordinary symbol (for example, 10 seconds etc.), the first entering using the opening period. The player may be configured to easily enter the first ball entry opening 64a by performing an effect on the player to cause the player to shoot the game ball toward the ball exit 64a. Furthermore, in the normal game of hitting the symbol, it is configured to open the first entrance 64a a plurality of times, and the first three times for a short period (for example, 0.5 seconds of opening time interval period (the first entrance) Opening the mouth 64a) for 0.5 seconds, and then setting an interval period (period for the first entrance 64a to be closed) for 5 seconds; The mouth 64a may be configured to be opened for one second. By doing this, the operation for opening the first ball entrance 64a is added to the fact that it is a period during which the first ball entrance 64a is open, using the period until the fourth long-term opening. Can be produced. Therefore, the opportunity which a player can enter into the 1st ball entrance 64a can be constituted intelligibly, and the fault which misses the opportunity which can enter a ball can be controlled.

  FIG. 7 (b) shows the case where the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a during the hit game of the normal symbol described above with reference to FIG. 7 (a) and the variation of the special symbol is started. It is the figure shown about the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. FIG. At the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a and the variation of the special symbol starts, the dynamic display of the special symbol supplementary symbol displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is started. As shown in FIG. 7 (b), the special-design supplementary pattern is configured by arranging a symbol row configured by “o” symbol and “x” symbol on the left and right. The winning of the special symbol is informed by the stop display of the "o" symbols aligned left and right, and when out of the case, the notification is displayed by the combination of the "o" symbol and the "x" symbol. Moreover, when it is a small hit, it is alert | reported by "x" symbol aligning right and left and being stop-displayed. Further, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, each symbol row is switched and displayed at a high speed by switching between the “o” symbol and the “x” symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (b), in sync with the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol, the fused symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area while maintaining the reach display mode, and the main symbol is displayed. A display mode effect of super reach in which a character or the like is displayed in the area Dm is displayed. FIG. 7B shows an example of the display mode of the super reach, in which the monster and the hero are displayed facing each other, and the characters “But the jackpot hit!” Are displayed. Here, in the display mode example of the super reach shown, the monster and the hero fight and the display mode in which the hero wins is displayed, and it is informed that the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol is the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol is configured at 1/40 in the normal gaming state (other than the time saving gaming state). Therefore, the variation of the normal symbol is started 40 times, and the gaming ball enters the first ball entry port 64a at a rate of once. On the other hand, the probability of winning a special symbol is configured to be 1/5, and the probability of winning is set high in advance. Therefore, it is a chance that the probability that the win is given is 1/5 that the fluctuation of the special symbol starts itself, and the display pattern of the super reach with high expectation for the win is displayed when the probability of the win is 1/5. It is configured to be.

  8 (a) starts the variation of the special symbol described above with reference to FIG. 7 (b), and the third symbol is displayed when the variation time of the special symbol is over when the result of the judgment is out. It is the figure shown about an example of the display mode displayed on display 81. At the timing when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variation of the special figure assist symbol displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is stopped at the combination of the "o" symbol and the "x" symbol indicating the deviation. In addition, the fusion symbol is also stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the reach symbol (in the present embodiment, "6" symbol) according to the timing at which the special symbol stops, and the middle blinking display portion DF2 is also displayed while maintaining the lighting state . Furthermore, the characters “Sorry !!” are displayed, and the player is informed of the fact that the judgment result is out of sight. Before the display mode shown in FIG. 8A is displayed, in the case of the super reach example shown in FIG. 7B, a display mode in which the hero loses to the monster is displayed, and then reduction is performed. The fused symbol which has been displayed is enlarged and displayed in the main symbol display area Dm.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol and the special symbol are variably displayed, but the fusion symbol is a variable symbol of the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol as a variation of 1 and the variation display is notified to the player Do. Thereby, in this embodiment, it becomes a hit of the normal symbol, and the variation of the special symbol is not started unless the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a during the hit game of the normal symbol, but the variation start of the normal symbol Since the variation of the fusion symbol is started based on it, it is possible to enjoy the game with the effect of the fusion symbol even in the period in which the variation of the special symbol has not started. Furthermore, since it is configured to display the hit of the normal symbol in the reach display mode of the fusion symbol, it is not necessary for the player to separate and recognize the normal symbol and the special symbol, and the expectation of being given the hit of the special symbol is high. It can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner that it is in a lost state. Furthermore, during a hit game of a normal symbol, a notification prompting the player to cause the game ball to enter the first ball-loading device 64 (corresponding to a small attacker in effect) is notified during the hit game, so the fusion symbol is a reach With the display mode, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the player stops the game ball from firing and misses the opportunity to enter the first ball entry port 64a.

  In addition, although illustration is omitted, when the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol is a jackpot, in the case of the super reach example shown in FIG. 7 (b), a display mode in which the hero wins the monster is displayed and thereafter The fused design that has been reduced is displayed enlarged. After that, the special figure assistance symbol is stopped and displayed with "○" symbols aligned, and the same symbol as the reach symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row and the fusion symbol is informed that the result of the pass / fail judgment was hit (big hit) Be done.

  In the present embodiment, the corresponding blinking display unit is configured to be variable depending on the hit and removal of the normal symbol. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and all the blinking display units blink corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol. As all, it blinks all based on the fluctuation start timing of the normal symbol, and the mode (for example, if it is a hit, all lights on, if it is out all lights off) at fluctuation stop timing It may be configured to display a confirmation. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the blinking display portion is a part of the symbol. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The background of the entire symbol may be a blinking display portion, or a character may be attached to the symbol. (For example, in the case of a cat character, only the bell part of the cat) may be used as the blinking display portion. By configuring in this manner, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the blinking display part, and it is possible to make the game by recognizing the fused symbol as a symbol notifying one lottery result (special symbol lottery result). Therefore, the player can easily play the game.

  In addition, with regard to the display corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol on the fusion symbol, not only the blinking display, but also the effect is attached to the symbol and the effect is displayed so as to indicate that the variation of the normal symbol is displayed. You may be comprised so that a part of symbol may be shaken and alerting | reported. Further, the common drawing auxiliary symbol may be displayed by being displayed in a blinking display portion or by an effect of the fusion symbol. By comprising in this way, the area | region which was displaying the common drawing auxiliary symbol can be utilized by the production | presentation of another game, and a display area can be utilized effectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG.8 (b) and FIG.10 (a)-(b), the pseudo | simulation fluctuation | variation of a fusion pattern is demonstrated. In the present embodiment, in order to show the player the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol as one variation, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the fused symbol. However, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the fusion symbol maintains the reach display mode correspondingly and is stopped and displayed at the variation stop timing of the special symbol. In this case, when the game ball is newly passed through the through gate 67, or when the holding ball of the normal symbol is stored, the normal symbol has a new fluctuation of the normal symbol even during the change of the special symbol. It is started. Therefore, when the change of the special symbol stops, the case where it is in the change of the normal symbol occurs, and it is not possible to change the fusion symbol at the change start timing of the normal symbol.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation of the normal symbol is newly started during the variation of the special symbol, and when the variation of the special symbol is stopped during the variation of the normal symbol, the variation of the combined symbol is stopped. In order to match the timing and the start timing of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is configured to execute the pseudo fluctuation of the fusion symbol.

  The flow of the pseudo-variation of the fused design will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b). In FIG. 10 (a), the third symbol is displayed in the case where the holding result of the lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol, and the drawing result of the drawing is out of the ordinary holding symbol. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the false change of the fusion design displayed on device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), first, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed triggered by the passage of the game ball to the through gate 67, the variation display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 Is started (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 6A is displayed). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, a selected fluctuation time such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds) elapses and the regular drawing fluctuation period ends, the hit symbol of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 6 (b) The display mode shown in is displayed. Then, the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is opened, and in the third symbol display device 81, a notification mode prompting the player to cause the game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64a of the first ball entry device 64. Is displayed (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 7A is displayed).

  Then, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, a lottery of a special symbol is performed, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, when the variable display of the special symbol is set, the pseudo fluctuation is made. It is determined whether or not to set (determination timing). Details will be described later in the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 43, but it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the 2 symbol of normal symbol, and when it is determined that the hit is within the 2 symbol of normal symbol, the pseudo variation is set (The pseudo setting flag 223h is set to on). That is, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), when all two reservations of the normal symbol are out, the pseudo fluctuation is not set at this time.

  By configuring in this way, the lottery result in the fluctuation of the normal symbol is out of place, but when the fluctuation that becomes the hit by the fluctuation within 2 suspension is started, the fluctuation continues until the fluctuation. By continuing the fluctuation of the fusion pattern, it is possible to perform various effects on the player using that period. Furthermore, even if the variation is out of alignment, the player can be expected to have an expectation. In addition, it is possible to reduce the frequency of stopping due to the out-of-place lottery result, and to make the player think that the frequency (probability) of hitting is high, and to play the game continuously.

  Furthermore, the variation of the special symbol is started in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 7 (b) is displayed), and the variation stop of the special symbol is 5 seconds before the false variation. It is determined again whether or not to set. Although the details will be described later in the pseudo variation setting process of FIG. 45, first, it is determined whether the pseudo variation is already set (the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON).

  If the pseudo variation is not set, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the 2 symbol of normal design, and if it is determined that the 2 hit is in the hit, the pseudo variation is set (the pseudo setting flag 223h Set on). On the other hand, when there is no hit within the 2 symbols of the normal symbol corresponding to the variable symbol of the normal symbol to be started next, in the execution period in which the normal symbol variation is stopped after the stop timing of the variable symbol of the special symbol. If it is an execution period in which a normal symbol variation that is stopped after the stop timing of the variation display of the special symbol is executed, a pseudo variation is set.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), the normal symbol variation is not executed within the 2 symbol holding of the normal symbol, but it is the execution period during which the normal symbol variation is stopped later than the stop timing of the variation display of the special symbol. , Set the pseudo-variation. At this time, a period from the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol under execution to the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol in order to make the end timing of the pseudo fluctuation to be set coincide with the fluctuation of the normal symbol in execution ) Is set as a pseudo fluctuation period.

  Here, when the variation of the fusion symbol is stopped based on the lapse of the variation period of the special symbol, the variation of the normal symbol is in progress, and the variation symbol of the fusion symbol is not started until the timing of the variation of the new ordinary symbol. Although the reserved symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the following lottery game is not started, which causes the player to be bored or an uneasy feeling that the game is not performed is generated. Is considered. However, in this embodiment, it is a period during which fluctuation of the normal symbol is being executed at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, and it is judged 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop, and the pseudo fluctuation of the fused symbol occurs in the period until its end. The player is able to play the game comfortably by the start of the fluctuation of the next fusion symbol along with the stop of the fusion symbol with good tempo.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the pseudo variation 5 seconds before the end timing of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and it may be configured to determine at the variation stop timing. Good. By configuring in this way, when passing the through gate 67 after 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the fluctuation of the fused symbol starts until the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol. Failure can be prevented. Alternatively, the control load may be reduced by increasing the chances of setting the pseudo fluctuation in advance by judging at both the advance timing such as 5 seconds before and the stop timing.

  In FIG. 10 (b), the third symbol is displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, and furthermore, the two suspension balls of which the lottery result is out and hit are stored in the holding ball of the regular symbol It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the false change of the fusion design displayed on display 81.

  Similar to FIG. 10 (a), the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit, the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is opened, and the special symbol triggered by the ball entry of the gaming ball to the first ball entry port 64a. If the result of the lottery is out, it is determined whether or not to set the pseudo-variation when the variation display of the special symbol is set. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), when the holding to be hit within the 2 symbols of the normal symbol is already stored, the pseudo fluctuation of up to 30 seconds at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol ends the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is set from Here, the reason for pseudo-fluctuation of up to 30 seconds is usually configured such that a hit time of 10 seconds is selected as a pattern fluctuation time, and a maximum of 10 seconds is selected in the case of disconnection. Therefore, even if the variation of the normal symbol being changed and the variation of 2 suspension are selected as long as 10 seconds respectively, the pseudo variation continues to be executed until the end of the variation of the 2nd normal symbol. Be done. Therefore, the pseudo change ends earlier than the change corresponding to the suspension of the normal symbol which becomes a hit, and there is a gap between the opening of the first entrance 64a and the game becoming jerky. It can be suppressed. In addition, the pseudo fluctuation of maximum 30 seconds which is set, the fluctuation of the normal symbol which becomes hitting ends, the 1st ball entrance 64a opens, the game ball enters and it is compulsorily triggered by the fluctuation start of the special symbol End. After that, the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row shown in FIG. 7 (a) is changed again from the effect of whether or not it is shown again in FIG. 8 (b)) The display to be switched to the effect is executed.

  By this, when the change start of the special symbol has already been determined, the hit change of the normal symbol has been determined (held in 2 hold), the re-change effect is displayed without displaying the out effect. It is possible to perform whether it is a variation of a normal symbol to be hit or not, and it is possible to produce again whether or not the special symbol is varied, and by reducing the frequency of the off effect, the player feels sorry The number of times can be reduced. In the present embodiment, although the variation of the normal symbol, which is a hit by the pseudo variation, is simulated but the variation of the special symbol is 30 because the game ball can not be entered into the first ball inlet 64a. If the pseudo fluctuation period of seconds does not start even after the lapse, the re-variation is not started and the fluctuation is ended with the effect of the pseudo fluctuation shown in FIG. 8B.

  On the other hand, at the start of variation of the special symbol, when the number of reserved symbols of normal symbols is less than 2 and the hold as the winning is not stored in 2 suspension, the pseudo variation is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. It is configured not to be. In that case, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), 5 seconds before the end of the variation period of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the 2 symbols of the normal symbol currently stored and stored. In this case, a maximum of 30 seconds of pseudo fluctuation is set as in the case of storing at the start of fluctuation. Further, it may be determined whether or not to set a pseudo change in a symbol determination period (1s in this embodiment).

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether to set the pseudo change at the start of the change of the special symbol and 5 seconds before the end of the change of the special symbol, but at the start of the change, the change is made It may be at the end time or only at the end of fluctuation. Furthermore, it may be configured such that determination is made only at the start of fluctuation, or each time general drawing suspension is established, or determination may be made in a predetermined period (for example, every 100 ms, etc.) It is also good.

  Next, with reference to FIG.8 (b), the display content of the pseudo | simulation fluctuation | variation of the fusion symbol in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 8 (b) shows the third symbol display device after stopping the variation of the special symbol when it is determined to set the pseudo variation at the determination timing of the pseudo variation described above with reference to FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b) It is the figure shown about an example of the display mode displayed by 81. FIG. As described above, when the variation of the special symbol is newly started during the variation of the special symbol and the variation of the special symbol is stopped during the variation of the normal symbol, the variation start timing of the special symbol and the variation of the ordinary symbol In order to match the start timing, after the variation of the special symbol is stopped and the special symbol (for example, FIG. 8 (a)) is displayed, it is configured to execute the pseudo variation effect of the fusion symbol There is.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b), since the normal symbol is being changed, the normal symbol is changed and displayed in the normal symbol display area Ds1. Then, a mode is displayed in which the fused symbol shows a sign of re-variation, such as the middle symbol row of the fused symbol of the main symbol display area Dm vibrating. In that there is a possibility that the re-variation of the special symbol may occur by continuously hitting the middle symbol row slightly press the button and also press the frame button 22 with the characters "re-variation chance with the button continuously hit !!" By displaying the mode to be shown, the effect of shaking in accordance with the frame button 22 is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In this way, by performing the pseudo-variation, it is possible to match the variation start timing of the special symbol and the variation start timing of the normal symbol, and to show the player the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol as one variation. Not only that, it is possible to give the player an expectation for the re-variation of the special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the situation that the player gets bored early in the game. In addition, in the re-variation effect, the probability that the sound effect at the time of pressing the frame button 22 is set to be high when the pseudo-variation is set is set high if the hold that becomes a hit is stored in 2 suspension The middle symbol may be configured to perform effects such as the size of shaking of the middle symbol increases with high probability, a special symbol is displayed, or a special lamp lighting mode is executed. In such a case, it is expected that the player can execute the start of the re-variation by configuring the same effect to be executed with low probability even when the suspension of winning is not stored. I can play a game. Furthermore, when the pseudo variation is being executed, in order to suppress the problem that the gaming ball is not fired at the timing when the first ball entry port 64a is opened, a notification to fire the gaming ball is given. Is fired to inform the middle symbol row to shake or to inform the through gate 67 to pass the game ball, and to notify the game ball to stay in the clune member 660 It is even better to have a configuration that

  9A shows an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the variation time of the normal symbol elapses from the state of FIG. It is the figure shown about. In the normal symbol display area Ds1, the stop display is performed in a state in which "o" and "x" symbols indicating the removal of the normal symbol are aligned. As for the fusion design, the scattered eyes of "7" symbol and "5" symbol are displayed on the left symbol row and the right symbol row. In addition, the blinking display areas DF1 and DF3 are also displayed in the lighted state and the lighted out state, and indicate the removal of the normal symbol. In the middle symbol row, the blinking display area Df2 is turned off and displayed, and it is informed that the special symbol has not changed.

  In the case of FIG. 9 (b), the variation of the special symbol described above with reference to FIG. 7 (b) is started, and the variation time of the special symbol is ended when the result of the pass / fail judgment is small. It is the figure shown about an example of the display mode displayed by symbol display 81. The variation of the special symbol displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 at the timing when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed is stopped and displayed in a state in which the “x” symbol is aligned showing a small hit. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), in sync with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the fused symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area while maintaining the reach display mode, and the main symbol is displayed. A display mode effect of super reach in which a character or the like is displayed in the area Dm is displayed. FIG. 9 (b) shows an example of the display mode of the super reach, in which the monster and the hero are displayed facing each other, and the characters, "If the hero wins, the jackpot !!" is displayed. Here, in the display mode example of the super reach shown, the monster and the hero fight and the display mode in which the hero wins is displayed, and it is informed that the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol is the jackpot. Here, if it is a small hitting fluctuation, a symbol imitating the second variable winning device 650 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before the end of the fluctuation period, and the gaming ball is inserted in the second specified winning opening 650a. A notification prompting the gaming ball to be played is executed. Here, when the player causes the game ball to enter the second specified winning opening 650a, and is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, the hero performs a special attack with the opening effect of the big hit game and the effect of defeating the monster is executed. Ru. If the game ball can not be entered into the second specified winning opening 650a, or if it is not detected by the V detection switch 650e5, blackout is performed as it is, and the next change is executed. In this embodiment, although the effect of blacking out is used, the small hit game ending effect is configured to display the effect or the like of the hero losing to the monster, and the result of the small hit game is displayed to the player. You may configure it.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is forcibly opened, the box base side and the box are removed. It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and performing dispensing of a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 11) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator (not shown) for attaching vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 11), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control unit such as the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate, such commands are mainly It is transmitted in one direction only from the controller 110 to the sub controller. On the other hand, data can be transmitted and received bidirectionally to the payout control device 111.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes various components such as a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, detection of gaming balls, and sensors (magnet sensors, radio wave sensors) for detecting illegal gaming. Various solenoids including a switch 208, an opening / closing solenoid 650f2 for opening / closing driving the opening / closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650, a switching valve solenoid 650c2 for driving the switching valve 650b3 in the second variable winning device 650, etc. 209 is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on the signal SG2.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the winning balls are continuously dispensed one by one by the payout motor 216. More specifically, one winning ball is paid out each time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that the payout motor 216 dispenses a predetermined number (100) of prize balls in a predetermined time (10 seconds). Further, each time a predetermined number (100) of the award balls are paid out, the payout balls are stopped for a predetermined period (one second). Thereby, for example, when it is necessary to pay out a large number of winning balls continuously, for example, a big hit, the paying out motor 216 continues to pay out the winning balls without a break, thereby suppressing the heat generation of the paying out motor 216 be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the breakdown of the pachinko machine 10 due to the resin portion and the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 melting due to the heat generation of the dispensing motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 is transmitted to the touchable portion of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the portion touched by the player such as the operation of the lower tray unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to get injured such as burns. It is possible to suppress the The number of payouts and the suspension period of the payout until the payout motor 216 stops the payout of the winning balls are not limited to the above, and may be arbitrarily determined as long as the heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, each time the payout motor 216 dispenses five or twenty-five balls, the payout may be stopped. Also, for example, the pause period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), Setting control of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 are known, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply circuit (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Thus, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control unit 110 executes main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery of special symbols, lottery of normal symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. The counters of these counters are selected by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to perform lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, etc. used.

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first hit type counter C2 used for the stop type, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of removal in the special symbol, and the small hit type counter CS3 used to select the small hit type of the special symbol The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 for the lottery of the normal symbol, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the common pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 used for the fluctuation pattern selection Is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 33) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 e of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol holding ball execution area 203a consisting of one execution area is provided, and in this area, the first hit random number counter C1, according to the timing of entering the first entrance 64a, The values of the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 are respectively stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and a ball is common in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through the symbol start opening (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 33).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a. It is stored in the execution area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table When it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a It is stored in the sphere execution area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is not a random number to be a big win of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol out of order, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is a random number to be a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball execution area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, there are 80 random number values that will be the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 79" are stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14A). It is done. As described above, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of large random number values is 80, so the probability of becoming a special symbol is 1/5.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first collision type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14B). As shown in FIG. 14 (b), when the special symbol is a big hit, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 49", the big hit type is "big hit A" Become. In addition, the jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit in which the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state is provided as a kind of removal (other than the big hit) of the special symbol. In the first random number counter C1, there are 100 small random numbers for the special symbol, and the random numbers "300 to 399" are the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14A). It is stored. As described above, since the total number of random numbers to be small hits is 100 while the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability to become a small symbol of a special symbol is "1/4".

  Further, the value of the small hitting type counter CS3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199, and the value of the small hitting type counter CS3 is provided in the ROM 202. The small hitting type is determined based on the first small hitting type selection table 202c (see FIG. 15). The contents of the small hitting game according to each small hitting type will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, for example, the stop type selection counter C3 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 determines the stop symbol of the fusion symbol at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The values of the stop type selection counter C3 are respectively distributed to the symbols "0" to "9". In addition, when the same symbol as the reach symbol is selected, the symbol obtained by adding 1 to the determined symbol is determined (for example, when the "9" symbol similar to the reach symbol is determined, " 0 'symbol is determined).

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type of the super reach is determined as the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern of the fused symbol) by the variation type counter CS1. In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the big hit fluctuation pattern selection table 202e1, the deviation fluctuation pattern selection table 202e2, and the small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 202e3 are respectively stored. A plurality of super reach variation pattern types are stored in each selection table. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set in each super reach type of each selection table, and the fluctuation type acquired from the selection table corresponding to the result of the judgment of acceptance (perce, out, or small hit) The type of super reach is determined based on the value of the counter CS1. A fluctuation time is set for each super reach type, and the fluctuation time and the type of super reach are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command. In the voice lamp control device 113, the details of the super reach are determined based on the notified variation pattern command and the value of the effect counter 223g acquired. As a result, the main controller 110 executes rough selection, and the voice lamp control device 113 performs more detailed selection, whereby the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the super reach determined by the main control unit 110 is the same for each super reach, but not limited thereto, it is configured to set and select the super reach of a plurality of variation times. You may Further, the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine the fluctuation time.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 in either the center or the right. Is detected and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is made by the second hit random number table. When it agrees with the value of the set random number, it is determined that the symbol is hit.

  There are six random number values corresponding to the normal symbol in the normal gaming state, and the range is “0 to 5”. These random number values are normally stored in the random symbol per table 202 d (see FIG. 14 (c)). As described above, since the total number of random numbers is 240, the total number of random numbers corresponding to the normal symbols is six, so the probability that the symbols are normally hit is "1/40".

  On the other hand, there are 240 random number values for winning a normal symbol in the time saving game state, and the range is “0 to 239”. These random number values are normally stored in the random symbol per table 202 d (see FIG. 14 (c)). As described above, since the total number of random numbers is 240, the total number of random numbers corresponding to the normal symbols is 240, so the probability that the normal symbols will be hit is "1/1", and the normal symbols must be always Become a hit.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 in the normal gaming state, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol is the common pattern fluctuation type counter It is executed for a period (5 to 10 seconds) according to the value of CS2. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 5", it is determined to be a hit, and after the fluctuation display is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is lit and displayed. , And the first ball entrance 64a is opened "for 2 seconds × 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, the first ball entry port 64a is opened only once for 2 seconds x 1 when the normal symbol is hit, but the opening time or number is It may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  In addition, when this pachinko machine 10 is in the short time gaming state (during the middle hours), it always becomes a hit of the normal symbol, and the time when the normal symbol is variably displayed is set to 3 seconds. In addition, the opening pattern is set such that the first ball entry port 64a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol comes into contact. As described above, in the time-saving game mode, the game ball is more easily entered into the first entrance 64a than in the normal game mode.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 33).

  In such a configuration, during the time saving game, the variation of the special symbol is easy to be executed, and the possibility of being a small hit or a big hit becomes high. Therefore, the possibility that the jackpot will be executed to the player is higher than the normal gaming state, and the jackpot can be awarded to the player continuously during the time saving game. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting the time saving game to be executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved. Also, in the time saving game state, the small hitting type selection table 202c is a table dedicated to time saving games, and in that table, the small hitting A is selected by setting the ratio at which the small hitting A is high In this case, the game detection ball can be easily detected by the V detection switch 650e5, and the probability that the jackpot game will be executed in a short time can be made higher.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the fluctuation pattern and the drawing of the ordinary symbol and the setting of the fluctuation pattern Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 12, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 33), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 17. FIG. 13A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13A, the ROM 202 includes a first random number table 202a, a first jackpot type selection table 202b, a small jack type selection table 202c, a second random number table 202d, and variation pattern selection. A table 202e, a big hit scenario table 202f, a small hit scenario table 202g, and a common drawing variation pattern selection table 202h are provided at least.

  As described above, the first random number table 202a is a table in which the value of the random number serving as the jackpot of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the value of the random number used as the small hit of a special symbol is also set to the 1st random number table 202a. The detailed contents of the first random number table 202a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The first jackpot type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The detailed contents of the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (b).

  The small hitting type selection table 202c is a data table in which the judgment value of the small hitting type counter CS3 for determining the small hitting type is set for each small hitting type. The detailed contents of the first small hitting classification selection table 202c will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second hit random number table 202d is a data table in which hit determination values of normal symbols are stored. When the random number value specified in the second random number table 202d matches the value of the second random number counter C4, it is determined that the symbol of the normal symbol is a big hit. The detailed contents of the second random number table 202d will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (c). In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is hit in the normal gaming state, the stop symbol is lit and displayed after the variation display of the predetermined time (10 seconds) is finished, and the first ball entrance 64a The motorized accessory (opening and closing door) attached to is opened "for 2 seconds × 1 time".

  On the other hand, in the time saving game state (time saving), it always hits the normal symbol, the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds, and the stop symbol is lit and displayed after the fluctuation display is finished, and the first ball entrance 64a The motorized accessory (opening and closing door) attached to the "2 seconds × 2 times" is opened.

  It should be noted that the value of the second random number counter C4 which is determined to be a normal symbol hit may be changed between the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state (during the short time).

  The variation pattern selection table 202e is a data table used to determine the display mode of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (d), the variation pattern selection table 202e has a variation pattern selection table 202e1 (not shown) for exclusive use when the determination result is a big hit, and the determination result is If the game is out of the normal game state, it is based on the out-of-bounds variation pattern selection table 202e2 (not shown), and if the result of the pass / fail determination is a small win, the dedicated small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 (not shown) Each is configured at least.

  The jackpot scenario table 202f is a data table used to determine an opening scenario for opening the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game, and a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning jackpot types are defined. It is done. Although not illustrated, the jackpot scenario table 202f is configured of a jackpot scenario a202f1 dedicated when the jackpot type is jackpot A and a jackpot scenario b202f2 dedicated when the jackpot type is jackpot B.

  In this jackpot scenario, various events (scenario content) are defined based on the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g (see FIG. 13B) whose count is executed when the jackpot scenario is set. The open / close control of the specific door 65f is executed based on the content.

  The small hitting scenario table 202g rotates the opening and closing piece 650b to the right so that the game ball can enter the second specified winning opening 650a which opens the opening and closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hitting game It is a data table used to determine the open scenario to be operated and the operation scenario to operate the switching valve 650b3, and a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning small hit type are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), the small hitting scenario table 202g is a small hitting scenario a202g1 (see FIG. 16 (b)) for exclusive use when the small hitting type is small hitting A and small hitting type In the case where B is a small hit B or C, a dedicated small hit scenario b 202 g 2 (see FIG. 16C) is used.

  In this small hitting scenario, various events (the contents of the scenario) are defined based on the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h (see FIG. 13 (b)) whose count is executed when the small hitting scenario is set. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing piece 650b is executed based on the contents of the scenario, and the operation control of the switching valve 650b3 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is executed. Further, in the processing for determining whether the passage of the ball into the second specified winning hole 650a and the V passage flow path 650e3 is normal, the range which allows the passage of the ball is also based on the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h. It is prescribed.

  The common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table 202h is a data table used to determine the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and the display pattern is defined for each value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2. In the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table 202h, a plurality of different tables corresponding to lottery results of normal symbols are defined. Specifically, the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table 202h is a common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) (see FIG. 17A) dedicated to the normal gaming state, and a common drawing dedicated to the time-saving gaming state. At least each of the figure fluctuation pattern selection table (time saving) (see FIG. 17B) is configured.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (b). FIG. 13B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol holding ball execution area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a time saving counter 203d and a counter buffer 203e. , A V flag 203 f, a big hit scenario counter 203 g, a small hit scenario counter 203 h, and the other memory area 203 z.

  The special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first entrance 64a and has one execution area, and in each of these areas, the first random number counter C1, the first jackpot type The values of the counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hitting type counter CS3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entrance 64a (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in the execution area. Ru.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening 67, and the acquired data is of four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the present embodiment, in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and as soon as the value of the counter C4 is obtained according to the passing through gate, the winning information information command including those values is an audio lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the common drawing winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the counter C4 from the common drawing winning information command, and uses them as common drawing winning information. It stores in the winning information storage area 223a.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c is the maximum number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal symbol starting opening 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 every time the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol starting opening) 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. It is incremented by 1 (see S604 in FIG. 29), and is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 28).

  When the ball passes through gate (normal symbol starting opening) 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S606 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the ball passes through gate (normal symbol starting opening) 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. (S603 of FIG. 29: No).

  The value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S506 in FIG. 28 and S605 in FIG. 29). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 each time the value of the normal design holding ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 normally holds the holding ball of the variable display held on the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The hour reduction counter 203d is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction game mode (time reduction), and if the value of the time reduction counter 203d is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction game state If the value of the hour / minute counter 203d is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (normal gaming state) of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203d is set to zero, and the main control unit 110 sets a value according to the jackpot type at the end of the jackpot ending (that is, the end timing of the jackpot). Specifically, in the normal gaming state, 3 is set if the jackpot type is "big hit A", 0 is set for "big hit B", and the jackpot type is "big hit A" in the time-saving game state In the case of "", 9 is set, and in the case of "big hit B", 3 is set. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the variation effect of the special symbol is finished, until the value of the hour / minute counter 203d becomes 0 (S213 in FIG. 25).

  When a normal symbol lottery is performed, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0, the value of the time saving counter 203d is referred to. And if the value is 1 or more, the lottery result is acquired based on the random symbol table (for high probability) per normal symbol in the short time game state (S510 in FIG. 28), and the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds (S518 in FIG. 28), and an opening pattern of 2 seconds.times.2 times is set as an opening pattern of the motorized accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first ball entrance 64a (S519 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, the lottery result is obtained based on the random number table per normal symbol (for low probability) in the normal gaming state (S511 in FIG. 28). Is set to 10 seconds (S520 in FIG. 28), and an opening pattern of 2 seconds.times.1 time is set as the opening pattern of the motorized role (opening / closing door) attached to the first entrance 64a (S521 in FIG. 28). ).

  As described above, the counter buffer 203 e is a buffer area used to count each counter value.

  The V flag 203 f is a flag for storing the fact that the ball has passed through the V passage flow path 650 e 3 which is a specific area of the second variable winning device 650, and the value of this V flag 203 f at the end of the small hit Based on the jackpot. The V flag 203 f is set to indicate the type of jackpot based on the small hitting type in the V passage processing (S 705 in FIG. 30), and is referred to in the small hitting ending control processing (S 1405 in FIG. 37). It is set to off (S1406 in FIG. 37).

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is shown in which the values of various counter values are added by timer interrupt processing, but any configuration capable of measuring an accurate period may be used. For example, clocking by an RTC (real time clock) The period of time may be used to measure.

  The jackpot scenario counter 203g is a counter for updating the jackpot scenario in which the opening / closing timing etc. of the specific door 65f is defined, and the jackpot scenario of the specific door 65f is based on the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot scenario counter 203g. Release control is performed. The jackpot scenario counter 203g is incremented by one when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot control process (S1102 in FIG. 34), and the jackpot scenario-based control ends in the jackpot ending control process, and the jackpot scenario is performed. Is reset after the setting is cleared (S1205 in FIG. 35).

  The small hitting scenario counter 203h is a counter for updating a small hitting scenario in which operation timings and the like of various devices (the opening and closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650, the switching valve 650b3) are defined. Operation control of various devices is performed during a small hit based on the small hit scenario updated by the counter 203h. The small hitting scenario counter 203h is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the small hitting scenario is set in the small hitting control process (S1302 in FIG. 36), and the small hitting ending control process is controlled based on the small hitting scenario. Is reset and reset after the small hitting scenario setting is cleared (S1404 in FIG. 37).

  Next, details of various tables included in the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17.

  First, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a). FIG. 14A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 14A, the first hit random number table 202a has the first hit random number counter C1 value “0 to 79” as the big hit determination value and the first hit random number counter C1 as the small hit determination value. The value “80 to 299” of the first random number counter C1 is set as the judgment value other than the large hit and the small hit (out) of the value “300 to 399” of the first.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to be a small winning with a probability of "1/5" and a winning with a probability of "1/5", and the lottery result of the special symbol is a drawing result of the special symbol There is a high probability that the small hit. By configuring in this way, the player is expected to expect whether or not the game ball can be passed to the V detection switch 650e5 in the small hitting game easily even if the big hit is not made due to the fluctuation of the special symbol. Many opportunities can be executed to further enhance the interest of the game. In this embodiment, the probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol or the probability of a small jackpot is constant even if the gaming state is variable, but a period for setting a high probability gaming state in which the probability of a jackpot is high, or a short time game Some of them may be configured to increase the probability of small hit. Also, a winning opening may be provided to start the second special symbol, and the probability of a small hit may be increased in the second special symbol. In addition, the jackpot is executed when the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, but the present invention is not limited thereto, until a predetermined condition is established (high probability next time jackpot or predetermined jackpot) It may be configured to give up to the variation of the number of special symbols.

  Next, the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 14B, in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, as the judgment value of jackpot A, the value “0 to 49” of the first collision type counter C2 is “50 to 99 as the judgment value for jackpot B. "Is set.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot game is started, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a large number of winning balls are made by entering the gaming balls into the first specified winning opening 65a. The game to be won is executed. Further, according to the jackpot type, a time saving game state advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot game is over.

  Next, the contents of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, in the normal gaming state, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game is over, the time saving gaming state (time saving) is 3 times Granted. On the other hand, in the time saving game state, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R) is started, and the time saving game state (time short) is awarded nine times after the end of the jackpot game.

  When the jackpot B is selected, in the normal gaming state, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R) is started, and the time saving game state (time saving) is not awarded after the jackpot game is over . On the other hand, in the time saving game state, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R) is started, and the time saving game state (time short) is awarded three times after the end of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, although the time reduction number is limited and applied, it may be configured to be applied to the next jackpot. In this case, by setting the jackpot type in which time saving is not provided (or the number of times of time saving is limited), it is possible to suppress that the jackpot is excessively continuous.

  As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, by winning the jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B) of the special symbol, it shifts to the time saving game state after the jackpot game is over, but it is round of the jackpot game The number is set smaller than the jackpot C or jackpot D. This is because the jackpot (jack C or jack D) which is executed by the game ball adding a specific area during a small hit game can make the player think that he has won the jackpot by himself, so the jackpot This is to make the bonus C or jackpot D a bonus that is more advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 14C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202d. As shown in FIG. 14 (d), the second hit random number table 202d has a value "0 to 5" of the second hit random number counter C4 in the normal gaming state as the hit determination value of the normal symbol, but in the time saving game state. The value "0 to 239" of the second random number counter C4 is set.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment normally wins with a lottery of symbols, with a probability of "1/40" in the normal gaming state, and with a probability of "1/1" in the time saving gaming state.

  FIG. 14D is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 14D, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table 202e1 (not shown), a deviation fluctuation pattern selection table 202e2 (not shown), and a small hitting pattern. At least a variation pattern selection table 202 e 3 (not shown) is set. The jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 is a data table in which the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is defined, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 Various jackpot variation patterns are selected. Similarly to the above-described variation table selection table for large hitting variation pattern selection table 202e2 and small variation pattern selection table 202e3, variation patterns for various variations and variation patterns for small variations based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected.

  Next, the small hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hitting type selection table 202c.

  As shown in FIG. 15, when it is a small hit of a special symbol, a small hit type when the random number value is "0 to 4" in the small hit type counter CS3 is "small hit A". . Moreover, the small hitting classification in case a random number value is "5-9" turns into "small hitting B". Further, the small hitting type in the case where the random number value is “10 to 199” is “small hitting C”.

  Here, the small hitting type will be described with reference to FIG. First, when "small hit A" is selected, a small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario a202g1 is executed as shown in the small hit scenario table 202g of Fig. 16 (a). In the small hitting game corresponding to the small hitting scenario a202g1, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), the opening and closing piece 650b is provided during a period in which the game ball can flow into the V passage flow passage 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650. An open scenario for opening for 1.5 seconds is set. That is, as a result of the small hitting game, it is possible for the game detection ball to be detected by the V detection switch 650e5, and in that case, it is set to be able to give a big hit.

  On the other hand, when "small hit B" and "small hit C" is selected, a small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 16 (see a) is executed. A small hit corresponding to the small hit scenario b202g2 In the hit game, as shown in FIG. 16 (c), the opening / closing piece 650b is set to be in a closed state during a period in which the game ball can flow into the V passage flow path 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650 That is, it is set to be unable to give a jackpot (difficult) as a result of a small hit game in which it is difficult to win a V detection switch 650e5. The variation time of the special symbol of 20 seconds is set for both "B" and "small hit C".

  In this manner, the game ball flows into the V passage flow path 650 e 3 which is a small winning which is advantageous for the small hitting gaming player by making the opening pattern of the opening and closing piece 650 b different in the small hitting gaming different depending on each small hitting type. It is possible to set possible small hit games and small hit games in which the game ball can not flow (hard) into the V passage flow path 650 e 3, which is an adverse small hit, and can provide various play characteristics. .

  Next, the small hit scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hitting scenario table 202g. In this small hitting scenario table 202g, a small hitting scenario corresponding to the small hitting type selected by the small hitting type selection table 202c is defined so as to be selectable, and a small hitting game is made based on the selected small hitting scenario. To be executed.

  The small hitting scenario table 202g has a small hitting scenario a202g1 dedicated to small hitting A and a small hitting scenario b202g2 dedicated to small hitting B or C as small hitting scenarios selected.

  First, the small hit scenario a202g1 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (b). FIG. 16B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hitting scenario a202g1. When the small hit scenario a202g1 is set, the small hit scenario counter 203h starts counting (S1302 in FIG. 36), and various controls set corresponding to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h are executed. . The counter value is added in the main processing of the main control unit 110 which is executed in a cycle of 4 milliseconds, and when the value of the counter value is incremented by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

  When the small hitting scenario a202g1 is set, and the counter value becomes 1, the small hitting opening period is started. When the counter value reaches 375 (1.5 seconds), the small hitting opening period ends, and the gaming ball can pass to the V passage flow path 650 e 3 in the second variable winning device 650 (V route open state In order to turn the switching valve 650b3 downward so that the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned on. Then, when the counter value is updated to 376, the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 is set to ON in order to open the open / close piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 (one round start). Thereafter, when the counter value reaches 750 (3 seconds elapsed), that is, 1.5 seconds after the opening / closing piece 650b is opened, the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to OFF in order to close the opening / closing piece 650b. (End of one round).

  The closing condition (end condition) of the opening and closing piece 650b in one round of the pachinko machine 10 is the case where 1.5 seconds have passed after the opening and closing piece 650b is opened, and ten balls at the second specified winning opening 650a. Is a prize. Although the details will be described later, if ten balls have won in the second specified winning opening 650a by 1.5 seconds after the opening and closing piece 650b is opened, the value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is 749 ( It is configured to execute a process of updating up to one piece before the end of one round). In addition, in the small hitting game, since the opening period of one round is set short, 10 balls will never enter the ball in practice, and the opening period will elapse before the 10 balls enter One round is configured to end. Thereby, it is comprised so that a prize ball may not be provided excessively by a small hit game, and it is comprised so that the difference with a big hit game may come out.

  With this configuration, the counter value is increased by one after that, and the counter value becomes 750, and the operation control for closing the opening and closing piece 650b is executed. Therefore, the opening and closing piece closing control is performed for each of a plurality of round end conditions. It is not necessary to execute the process, and the processing load can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in the operation control of the open / close solenoid 650f2 when the round end conditions occur substantially at the same timing. .

  Then, when the counter value is updated to 751, the ending period of the small hit is started, the ending display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the counter value becomes 1000 (4 seconds elapsed), the second variable winning prize is reached. The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF to turn the switching valve 650b3 upward so that the gaming ball can not pass (difficult) the V passage flow path 650e3 in the device 650 (V route closed state) Do. Then, when the counter value reaches 1500 (6 seconds have elapsed), the small hitting ending period is ended.

  By setting as described above, after the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON and the V route is open, in the V effective period until the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF and the V route is closed. Since the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to ON and the opening / closing piece 650b is in the open state, it is possible to allow the gaming ball entered into the second specified winning opening 650a to flow down to the V passage flow path 650e3. That is, a period (counter value 376 to 750) from when the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 is set to on and the open / close piece 650b is opened, and then the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 is set to off so that the open / close piece 650b is closed. ) Can make the game ball detected by the V detection switch 650e5 and give a jackpot game to the player by causing the game ball entered in the second specified winning hole 650a to flow down to the V passage flow path 650e3 It will provide a small hit game.

  Next, the small hitting scenario b202g2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hitting scenario b202g2. The small hitting scenario b202g2 is a small hitting scenario in which the small hitting type is set for the small hitting B or the small hitting C as described above, and it is difficult for the game detection ball to be detected by the V detection switch 650e5. It is a scenario that provides a small hit game.

  The small hitting scenario b202g2 is set, and when the counter value becomes 1, the small hitting opening period is started. When the counter value reaches 375 (1.5 seconds), the small hitting opening period ends, and the gaming ball can pass to the V passage flow path 650 e 3 in the second variable winning device 650 (V route open state In order to turn the switching valve 650b3 downward so that the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned on.

  Then, when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have passed), the small hitting opening period is ended, and the gaming ball can not pass (difficult) to the V passage flow path 650 e 3 in the second variable winning device 650 In order to turn the switching valve 650b3 upward so that the V route is closed, the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF.

  When the counter value is updated to 1001, the open / close solenoid 650f2 is set to ON to open the open / close piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 (one round start). Thereafter, when the counter value reaches 1375 (5.5 seconds elapsed), that is, 1.5 seconds after the opening / closing piece 650b is opened, the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to OFF to close the opening / closing piece 650b. (End of one round).

  Then, when the first round ends, the small hitting ending period is executed until the counter value reaches 1500 (6 seconds have elapsed).

  By setting as described above, after the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON and the V route is open, in the V effective period until the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF and the V route is closed. Since the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is inoperable and the opening / closing piece 650b is in the closed state, the gaming ball entered into the second specified winning opening 650a can not flow down to the V passage flow path 650e3, and the second specified winning opening All gaming balls having entered the ball 650a are guided to the discharge flow path 650e1. In other words, it is impossible to cause the game ball to enter the second specified winning hole 650a to flow down to the V passage flow path 650e3 and the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5 to give the player a big hit game ( A difficult small hit game will be provided.

  As described above, in the small hitting scenario a202g1 and the small hitting scenario b202g2, the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is turned on and off at the same timing as the small hitting start timing (special figure stopping timing). The timing to turn 650 f 2 on and off differs. As described above, it is possible to control whether the V detection switch 650 e 5 is detected or not by making the timings of turning on and off the open / close solenoid 650 f 2 different according to the small hit type, so a big hit is given to the player. Small hit (in the present embodiment, a small hit A), and a small hit (in the present embodiment, a small hit B and C in the present embodiment) to which the player is not given a big hit can be set to provide various play characteristics. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the start timing of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the opening effect of the small hitting game is 1 second before the opening operation of the opening and closing piece 650b for both the small hitting scenario a202g1 and b202g2 Because until the period, in the third symbol display device 81, the effect of the combined symbol (a battle effect between a monster and a hero) is displayed, is it a small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario a202g1, It is configured that it is difficult to determine whether it is a small hitting game corresponding to the small hitting scenario b202g2. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize in advance whether the small hitting type can be detected by the display period of the opening effect or the like and the V detection switch 650 e 5 can be detected, and the small hitting By actually playing a game, it is possible to cause the V detection switch 650 e 5 to perform the game in anticipation of detection of a game ball.

  Next, the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. In the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table 202h, as shown in FIG. 17, a common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) (see FIG. 17A) and a common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table (short) (FIG. b) See at least).

  First, the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a common drawing variation pattern selection table (normal). The common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) is a data table in which the display mode (the fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation pattern selected in the normal gaming state is defined, and the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is Various variation patterns (variation time and winning presentation time) are selected based on the above.

  The common pattern fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) has the normal pattern per fluctuation pattern A to C set as the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is a hit, and in the normal gaming state As a variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the normal symbol is out, the normal pattern variation variation patterns A to C are set.

  First, the variation patterns A to C per normal symbol selected when the lottery result of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is a hit will be described. The normal symbol variation pattern A is set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is “0 to 79”, and the normal symbol variation pattern B has the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 “80 to 149” The normal pattern variation pattern C is set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "150 to 198". As for the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation patterns A to C per normal symbol, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds and a hit rendering time of 3 seconds are set for all.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the hit of the normal symbol is configured to be 10 seconds, and as described above, the game ball entered in the ball entry section of the crew member 660 is discharged from the ball exit 660a. It is configured to take about 10 seconds to be done. Therefore, when the lottery result is a hit after passing through gate 67, the game ball entered from ball exit 660a of clune member 660 is discharged at the timing when the fluctuation ends, so the first ball entry is performed. The game ball can be made to flow down to the first ball entry device 64 at the timing when the open / close door of the device 64 is opened. Therefore, even when the player has stopped firing the game ball, the game ball can be made to enter the first ball entrance 64a at the timing when the open / close door is in the open state.

  Next, normal symbol off fluctuation patterns A to C which are selected when the lottery result of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is out will be described. The normal off pattern variation pattern A is a variation pattern in which the variation time set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is “0 to 29” is a variation pattern of 10 seconds, and the normal off pattern variation pattern B is a normal symbol variation The fluctuation time set in the case where the value of the type counter CS2 is "30 to 99" is a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds, and for the normal out-of-pattern fluctuation pattern C, the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 is "100 to 198" The fluctuation time set in the case of is a fluctuation pattern of 5 seconds.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17 (b), a common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table (time saving) will be described. FIG. 17B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table (time saving). The common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table (time saving) is a data table in which the display mode (the fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation pattern to be selected in the short time gaming state is defined. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol in the time saving game state is “1/1”, and the probability of a normal symbol is always hit.

  Similar to the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) described above, the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table (time short) also selects various fluctuation patterns based on the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2, and against the jackpot fluctuation pattern The only difference is that the variation pattern (variation time) to be selected is different, so the description is omitted.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a common pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 222b, a small hitting fluctuation pattern selection table 222c, and a pseudo fluctuation pattern selection table 222d. Although the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is already known and will be briefly described, the rough fluctuation content (variation time) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 Are referred to when determining the detailed contents of the change. Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined.

  The common pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 222b and the small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 222c are also the fluctuation pattern command based on the common pattern fluctuation pattern command or the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control unit 110, similarly to the fluctuation pattern table 222a. It is referred to when deciding the detailed contents of fluctuation from the rough contents of fluctuation (time of fluctuation, type of fluctuation) shown by. Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined.

  The pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d is a table defining the effect display content of the pseudo variation which is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, with the pseudo fluctuation, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is newly started during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped during the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol, the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol and the ordinary In order to match the variation start timing of the symbol, it is the variation that is executed after the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  The detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 18B, but the pseudo variation pattern is selected based on the set effect type and the value of the presentation counter 223g using the pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d. Be done.

  Next, the pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (b). FIG. 18B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d. The pseudo variation pattern selection table 222 d is a data table used to determine the display mode of the pseudo variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each of the effect type of the pseudo variation and the value of the effect counter 223 g.

  Here, the effect type of the pseudo variation will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 10 (a), 5 seconds before the variation of the special symbol stops, there is no hit in the 2 symbols of the normal symbol, and the regular symbol stops after the stop timing of the next special symbol. When the fluctuation of is being executed, the out-of-order false fluctuation is set in the fluctuation time of the difference time t1 from the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop of the fluctuation of the normal symbol.

  On the other hand, as described above with reference to FIG. 10 (b), if the judgment result of the special symbol starting to change is out of place and there is a hit within the next 2 normal symbols, the simulation continues for up to 30 seconds A change is set.

  The pseudo fluctuation pattern selection table 222d is referred to when selecting a pseudo fluctuation pattern based on the set effect type and the value of the effect counter 223g in the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (S2102 in FIG. 44). Specifically, in the case where the effect type is out, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 30", "the outlier false change pattern A" is selected, and the value of the effect counter 223g is " If it is 31 to 100, then "off false fluctuation pattern B" is selected, and if the value of effect counter 223g is "101 to 198", "off false fluctuation pattern C" is selected. Ru.

  On the other hand, when the effect type is continued, when the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 50", "continuation pseudo change pattern A" is selected, and the value of the effect counter 223g is "51 to In the case of 130 ", the" continuous pseudo variation pattern B "is selected, and in the case where the value of the effect counter 223g is" 131 to 198 ", the" continuous pseudo variation pattern C "is selected.

  The variety of continuous pseudo fluctuation patterns is a pseudo fluctuation of up to 30 seconds, and it is a production mode that is switched to the re-change production (the change production of the fusion symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol) at the timing when the change of the special symbol starts. It is configured. On the other hand, in various out-of-order false variation patterns, blackout is set in the set false variation period.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a common drawing prize information storage area 223a, a common drawing fluctuation start flag 223b, a pseudo fluctuation flag 223c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, and a stop type A selection flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a pseudo setting flag 223h, and a pseudo variation setting area 23i are provided at least.

  The common drawing prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, the second hit random number counter which is the prize information The value of C4 is stored. In this pachinko machine 10, when the game ball passes through gate (normal symbol starting port) 67, it corresponds to the through gate passing from the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired according to the through gate passing. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of a normal symbol to be made is performed, and the predicted various information is voiced from the main control unit 110 The lamp control device 113 is notified by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (eligibility, stop type, fluctuation pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The common drawing fluctuation start flag 223b is set ON when the common drawing fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1713 in FIG. 40), and in the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection processing, the third symbol display device It is set to be off when the setting of the variable display of the normal symbol in 81 is made (S 2001 in FIG. 44). When the common drawing fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, a common drawing fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the common drawing fluctuation pattern extracted from the received common drawing fluctuation pattern command.

  The display common drawing variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602 in FIG. 39) of the main process executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display common drawing fluctuation pattern command, the common drawing fluctuation pattern indicated by the display common drawing fluctuation pattern command, the common drawing of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 Display control of the fluctuation effect is started so that the fluctuation display is performed.

  The pseudo variation flag 223c is a flag used to determine whether or not the display mode of the fused symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is in the pseudo variation, and is set to ON in the pseudo variation start setting process (FIG. 44) In step S2104), the fluctuation pattern setting process is set to off (S1904 in FIG. 43). When this pseudo change flag 223c is set to ON, a new change in the fused pattern is not started even when the change start timing of the normal symbol comes, and a common figure auxiliary symbol (displayed in the normal symbol display area Ds1) The fluctuation start is executed only with the

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d is, similarly to the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the fluctuation effect (variation display) performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter which counts up to four times the common drawing reservation ball number (waiting number) of the fluctuation production currently held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the normal symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the common drawing holding ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d counts the number of holding balls of the normal symbol. Is supposed to manage.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of common drawing holding balls of the variable display is added by passing to the through gate 67, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the normal symbol and holds the ball When the number is subtracted, a general drawing reservation ball number command indicating the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the common drawing holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the common drawing holding ball number command. Then, it is stored in the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d (S1710 in FIG. 40). Thus, since the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d is updated in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the common drawing holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the normal symbol holding ball of the main control device 110 is kept. The value can be updated while being synchronized with the number counter 203c.

  The value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223 d is used to display the common drawing holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d in response to the reception of the common drawing holding ball number command, and the normal symbol holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223 b, a display general drawing reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display-general-diagram holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, ie, the value for the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the number-of-balls pattern in the common drawing reservation number display area Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223 d is changed in synchronization with the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203 c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is possible to change the number of common drawing reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while synchronizing with the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1702 in FIG. 40), and in the fluctuation pattern selection process (see S1802 in FIG. 42), 3 is set to OFF when the setting of the variation display of the special symbol in the symbol display device 81 is made (S1901 in FIG. 43). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the display control is performed in the command output process (S1602 in FIG. 39) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1705 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (S1808 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, a stop symbol (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type) of the fusion symbol corresponding to the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop symbol is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the fluctuation effect is performed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter used when determining the fluctuation patterns of the pseudo fluctuation and various fluctuation. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although illustration is omitted, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time the main processing is executed (S1611 in FIG. 39).

  The pseudo setting flag 223 h is a flag that is set on to execute the pseudo change. The false setting flag 223h is set to the start of the change display in the change pattern selection process (see S1802 in FIG. 42), the lottery result of the special symbol (at the start of the change) is out, and 2 of the next normal symbol If there is a hit in the hold, it is set to on (S1910 in FIG. 43). That is, the pseudo setting flag 223 h is a flag indicating that it is determined that the pseudo change is to be performed after the stop of the special symbol during the change of the special symbol. Also, in the pseudo variation setting process (see S1614 in FIG. 45), 5 seconds before the stop of the special figure variation, the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to OFF, and there is a hit within the next 2 normal symbols, This is set to ON when it is a period during which a normal drawing change to be stopped after the stop timing of the special drawing is executed (S2210, 2213 in FIG. 45). On the other hand, in the pseudo variation start setting process, it is set to off (S2107 in FIG. 41). By setting the pseudo setting flag 223 h to ON, the start of the pseudo variation is executed after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the fusion symbol comes off and stops at the symbol, and to reduce the frequency at which the player is disappointed with the determination result of the disconnection. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, even if the variation of the out-of-the-box fusion symbol is made, by making the player play with more expectation, it is possible to suppress the player from being bored.

  The pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i is a storage area in which fluctuation data (a fluctuation period, a fluctuation pattern, etc.) of the pseudo fluctuation is set.

  The number-of-holds counter 223 j is a counter for setting the number of the held symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the variation of the special symbol or during the pseudo variation, the new variation of the normal symbol is not started with the fusion symbol, but is executed only with the common figure assistance symbol. In this case, the update of the holding symbol of the normal symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not dare, and it is configured to make it appear that 1 variation of the fusion symbol corresponds to 1 variation of the holding symbol. doing. However, in this case, a difference occurs between the actual number of pending items and the number of pending symbols being displayed. Therefore, by separately providing a counter for displaying the holding symbol, the difference from the actual number of holdings can be grasped, and when a difference occurs as described later, a new symbol of the normal symbol is generated. In the change of the fusion design corresponding to the start of the change, execute the pseudo linked general drawing to perform the pseudo stop, and execute the subtraction of the hold number counter 223j at the timing of the pseudo stop to match the actual hold number It is configured to make corrections. Therefore, correction can be performed even if a difference occurs with the actual number of reservations. In addition, in the state where the difference has occurred, when the retention of the normal symbol is not stored, the difference from the actual suspension is corrected by configuring the fused symbol to change 1 in a pseudo-off manner. It is good to correct it by configuring as above.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is configured to read the control program directly from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes because the speed associated with the reading is slow, the instruction for the control program can be read. It sometimes takes time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily enlarged. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM 234 d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, in the initialization process (see S2302 in FIG. 46) executed after the boot process by the boot program (S2301 in FIG. 46) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the corresponding program.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 48 (b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates the increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  Also, since transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the entry of the first ball entrance 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2303 and S2304 in FIG. 46).

  The power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power on to display the third image at the power on main image. 81 is displayed (the third symbol display device 81 displays "o" and "x").

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the fluctuation effect when it is "the jackpot of the special symbol", and the image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the fluctuation effect when it is "the out of special symbol".

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance 64a, the power fluctuation image is displayed when the power is turned on. The image controller 237 from the MPU 231 so that the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235 b and the image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Directed against. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected at the first entrance 64a while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Can.

  Returning to FIG. 19, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the range of the back surface image and the back surface image stored in the back surface image area 235c in the back surface image will be described. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the two types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. FIG. 20 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage" while the back surface A corresponds to the "town stage".

  As the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, as shown in FIG. 21, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "image for scrolling") are configured such that the back surface images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "at-the-city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between position a and position a 'of the corresponding back image first. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 20A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the stage in the city, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the stage in the city displayed frequently is the back image area By being resident on 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage is a partial area of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b Is stored in the rear image area 235c of

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing. In order to change the back image instantly, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but in such a case, it becomes very useful as the resident video RAM 235. A large amount of RAM must be used, which may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ', and the position a to the position a including the initial position Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the player can press the frame button by the player. When the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of 22, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed by the third symbol by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 It can be displayed on the device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone is not changed with the passage of time. It is possible to display et al. Further, as for the back surface B, only the image data corresponding to the partial image range is stored, so that the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image at the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236 a (see FIG. 19) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back surface B, an image corresponding to an image between the position b ′ and the position b in the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 19, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols assigned with the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after the entry to the through gate 67 occurs, the third symbol display device 81 does not immediately start the variation effect in spite of the fact that the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short term of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short term of the normal symbol. The longer the short term of this normal symbol is, the more chances of the game ball passing through the first entrance 64a, so the chance of drawing a special symbol lottery increases, and the opportunity to hit a special symbol is also Become more. As a result, the chances of the opening of the open / close door associated with the first entrance 64a becoming a big hit of the special symbol increase, so it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the specified winning opening 65a. In addition, since the chance to open the opening and closing piece 650b is increased as it becomes a small hit of the special symbol, it becomes easy for the gaming ball to enter the second specified winning hole 650a, and the gaming ball flows into the V passage flow path 650e3. It will be easier. Therefore, the longer the short term of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the jackpot game will be given can be given to the player, thereby enhancing the player's willingness to participate in the game. it can. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, since the first ball entrance 64a is a winning opening in which five game balls are paid out as a winning ball when the game ball enters the ball, the opening and closing accompanying the first ball entrance 64a becomes a big hit of an ordinary symbol. When the door is opened and the gaming ball can easily enter the first entrance 64a, the number of winning balls increases. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get the expectation that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the special symbol being held will be a big hit of the special symbol in the ending effect, the player can select the special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol being held. Since it can be recognized that the player wins the jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the jackpot of the special symbol will surely be made. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage," "empty stage" and "island stage") is displayed Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22). "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (FIG. 23) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Also, in this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, and a display data table buffer 233d according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is provided frame by frame according to the set data table. Can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, the display data table buffer 233 d corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be created can be realized for the first time based on the configuration that the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. .

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (the address “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 23 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean.

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22) In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, for each update of the pointer 233f, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (FIG. 23) described later is created. At the same time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list Do.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 (S2305 in FIG. 46). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the transfer setting process. It is set to OFF (S4605 in FIG. 60 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (S2601 in FIG. 48 (b)). When the display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2608 in FIG. 48B) and the simplified display setting process (FIG. 48) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (B) (see S2609) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (FIGS. 49 to 57) and display setting processing (FIG. 58) are performed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (S4501 of FIG. 60A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (FIG. 60 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 61) is executed to transfer the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. The below-mentioned drawing list (FIG. 23) which describes the instruction content of the image drawing with respect to is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (FIG. 23) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d according to the command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command etc. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (FIG. 23) described later describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame Do.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (S2603 in FIG. 58) In the above, the pointer update process (S4205 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. As shown in FIG. 23, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2 ···), characters (character 1 · character 2 ··· Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is performed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. Every time it is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (S4207 in FIG. 58). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (S2302 in FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S4713 in FIG. 61). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (S4714 in FIG. 61), The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (S4802 in FIG. 62).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (FIG. 48B) is performed, the process is performed (S4803 of FIG. 62).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<About control processing of main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 24 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated with power on and a main process executed after the start-up process, and activated periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment) There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start-up. The processing and the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every two milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter CS3 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (in this embodiment, 399, 99, 99, 239, 199, respectively) is reached, each value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area (counter buffer 203i) of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing is processing for performing display in the first symbol display device 37 and setting a variation pattern (variation time) and the like of the third symbol variably displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Is executed (S104), and thereafter, a start winning process is executed (S105), which is associated with a winning on the first ball entrance 64a (start winning). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 11) is executed (S106), and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is performed. The through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) and the through gate passing processing (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. After the through gate passage processing is performed, the emission control processing is performed (S108), and the V passage processing (S109) is performed. The details of the V-passing process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S109 is finished, other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is If it is not changing (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entry port 64a (starting port) (S203). Here, the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64a (S203: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entry ball slot 64a (S203: Yes), the first collision random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stopped The values of the type counter C3 and the small hit type counter CS3 are acquired, and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball execution area (S204).

  When the process of S204 is finished, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display is executed in the first symbol display device 37 (S205), and this process is ended. In addition, the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S206). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S206: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (not shown), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S206, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S206: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S207). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S205) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process (S205) is executed, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set based on the values of the various counters stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a. More specifically, if it is the jackpot of the special symbol, it is determined which jackpot A or jackpot B will be the jackpot according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it becomes big hit A, blue LED is lighted in predetermined | prescribed LED of LED37a of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37, and when it becomes big hit B, red LED is lighted. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S207 is completed, when the variable display under execution is started in the first symbol display device 37, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 26) (this time lottery It is determined whether the result is a jackpot of a special symbol (S208). Then, if the lottery result this time is a jackpot of a special symbol (S208: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set using a jackpot scenario table (not shown) (S209). When the process of S209 is completed, the value of the time-span counter 203d is set from the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14B) based on the jackpot type and the gaming state gaming state (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state). Then, the process proceeds to step S215.

  On the other hand, in the process of S208, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S208: No), it is then determined whether the current lottery result is the small symbol of the special symbol (S211). In the process of S211, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit of the special symbol (S211: Yes), the small hitting start setting process is executed to start the small hitting (S212), S213 Move to the process of The details of the small hitting start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S211, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit of the special symbol (S211: No), since the current lottery result is a special symbol off, the process directly shifts to the process of S213.

  In the process of S213, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour and hour counter 203d is greater than 0 (S213), and if it is determined that the value of the hour and hour counter 203d is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S213: Yes), The value of the time saving counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S214), and the process proceeds to S215. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203d is not 1 or more (0) (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S215.

  In the processing of S215 executed after the processing of S210, S213, or S214, the lighting of the LED which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the processing of S207 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to synchronize the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the special drawing auxiliary symbol, etc. displayed in step S215.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation start process (S205) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S205). This special symbol variation start process (S205) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired and stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a (S301). Next, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the process of S301 is acquired (S302). Specifically, the respective values of the first random number counter C1 of the special symbol, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter CS3 are acquired.

  After the process of S302, the lottery result is acquired based on the first hit random number table 202a corresponding to the type of the special symbol acquired in the process of S302 (S303). More specifically, the lottery result is acquired by comparing the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S302 with the jackpot determination value stored in the first random number table 202a. As described above, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 79", the lottery result of the big hit is obtained, and in the case of "300 to 399", the lottery result of the small hit is obtained (FIG. )reference).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S303 is a big hit (S304). When it is determined in the process of S304 that the lottery result is a big hit (S304: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S305).

  More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S302 is referred to, and compared with the random number value defined in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, the jackpot of two types of special symbols Of the types (jackpot A, jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot A (15R jackpot) is set, and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (15R The jackpot) is set (see FIG. 10 (b)).

  In the process of S305, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the set jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  After the process of S305, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 14D) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S301 (S306) And the process of S312.

  When the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S306, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and the third pattern display device 81 is stopped until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S304 that the lottery result is not a big hit (S304: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result is a small win (S307). In the process of S307, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the small hit type is set (S308), and acquired in the process of S301 The small hitting variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S309), and the process proceeds to the process of S312.

  If it is determined in the process of S307 that the lottery result is not a small hit (S307: No), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol is set (S310).

  When the process of S310 is finished, a deviation fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S301 (S311), and the process proceeds to S312.

  In the process of S311, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S306, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S301 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  When the process of S306, S309 or S311 is finished, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S306, S309 or S311 is set (S312). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S305, S308 or S310 is set (S313). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 33). Ru. When the processing of S313 is finished, the processing returns to the special symbol variation processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the small hitting start setting process (S212) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the small hitting start setting process (S212). This small hitting start setting process (S212) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), and is a process for setting the start of the small hitting game.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the small hitting game is started, the second variable winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which the ball can win (easy), and the ball winning in the second variable winning device 650 is By passing through the specific area (V detection switch 650 e 5), a big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends.

  That is, in the gaming state in which the small hitting game is executed, the big hit game is executed compared to the advantageous state in which the ball can be won in the second variable winning device 650 (a winning ball can be obtained) and the normal gaming state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state where the possibility of being

  Referring back to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. In the small hitting start setting process (S212), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hitting A (S401). In the process of S401, if it is determined that the small hitting A (S401: Yes), using the small hitting scenario table 202g, set the small hitting scenario a202g1 corresponding to the small hitting type (small hitting A) ( S402), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S401, when it is determined that it is not the small hitting A (S401: No), using the small hitting scenario table 202g, the small hitting scenario b202g2 corresponding to the small hitting type (small hitting B, C). The setting is made (S403), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 11) or the first ball entry It is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric part (opening and closing door) attached to the mouth 64a.

  In this normal symbol variation processing (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display showing the hit in the second symbol display device 83 and the opening and closing of the motorized part (opening and closing door) associated with the first ball entrance 64a It is included that control is being performed. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S501: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device 83 is selected. If the display mode is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S504), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c is not larger than 0 (not 0) If it is determined that (S504: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted, and a common drawing holding ball number command is set (S506). In the process of S506, a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  When the process of S507 is completed, it is next determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of the time of the normal symbol (whether the value of the time counter 203d is greater than 0 or not) (S508). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol of time and time (the value of the time counter short 203d is greater than 0) (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current special symbol is a big hit (S509). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included.

  In the process of S509, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S509: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is not during the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, it is acquired by the processing of S507. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second collision type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 239", it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. That is, in the time saving state, it always becomes a hit of an ordinary symbol. (Refer FIG.14 (c)).

  On the other hand, in the process of S509, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S509: Yes), it proceeds to the process of S511.

  If it is determined in the process of S508 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving mode of the normal symbol (the value of the hour / midday counter 203d is 0) (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 Based on the second hit random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the hit is a normal symbol is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "6 to 239", the normal symbol is out It determines with it being (refer FIG.14 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a hit of the normal symbol (S512). If it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (S512: Yes), the display mode of the hit is set in the second symbol display device 83 (S513), and the process proceeds to S515. In the process of S513, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, it is set so that the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol).

  On the other hand, in the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S512: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set to the second symbol display device 83 (S514), and the process proceeds to S515. . In the process of S514, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  In the process of S515, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is acquired (S515), and then it is determined whether or not the time is short (whether the value of the time counter 203d is greater than 0) (S516).

  If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol time and day (when the value of the time counter short 203d is greater than 0) (S 516: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol. (S517). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included.

  In the process of S517, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S517: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 and the common pattern variation pattern selection table for the time saving state, a variation pattern per normal symbol is selected, and a common symbol for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined variation pattern A figure fluctuation pattern command is set (S518). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is compared with the random number value stored in the common pattern variation pattern selection table for the time saving state. For example, if the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79", select the normal symbol variation pattern D (variation time 3 seconds), and if it is in the range of "80 to 149", the normal symbol The variation pattern E (variation time 3 seconds) is selected. In addition, if the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "150 to 198", the normal symbol variation pattern F (variation time 3 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17B). The common drawing fluctuation pattern command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 33).

  When the process of S518 is completed, the gaming state is short, so the opening time of the motorized accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first ball entrance 64a is set to 2 seconds, and the opening number is set to 2 (S519) , End this process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S516, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time zone of the normal symbol (the value of the hour counter 23d is 0) (S516: No), and in the process of S517, the special symbol is If the jackpot is in progress (S517: Yes), the process proceeds to S520.

  In the process of S520, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S515 Based on the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table for gaming state, the normal pattern per fluctuation pattern is selected, and the common drawing fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined fluctuation pattern is set (S520). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is compared with the random number value stored in the common drawing variation pattern selection table for the normal gaming state. For example, if the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79", select the normal symbol variation pattern A (the variation time of 10 seconds), and if it is in the range of "80 to 149", the normal symbol The variation pattern B (variation time 10 seconds) is selected. Further, if the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "150 to 198", the normal symbol variation pattern C (the variation time of 10 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17A). The common drawing fluctuation pattern command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 33).

  When the process of S520 ends, the gaming state is not short, so the opening time of the motorized role (opening and closing door) attached to the first ball entrance 64a is set to 2 seconds, and the opening frequency is set to 1 (S521) , End this process.

  As described above, when the gaming state of the normal symbol is the short time gaming state (during the short time), the gaming state of the normal symbol is compared with the normal gaming state (during the short time), the time of the variable display is “10 seconds → As the opening period of the motorized part (open / close door) attached to the first entrance 64a becomes long as "2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times", the first entering The ball easily enters the ball opening 64a.

  Moreover, in the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), whether or not the change time of the change display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S522). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S518 or the processing of S520.

  In the process of S522, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the fluctuation time of the currently executed fluctuation display has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is not performed and the display mode is set by the processing of S514, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) in the second symbol display device 83 Are set to When the stop display is set by the process of S523, the second symbol display updating process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 33) is performed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or S514.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S524). If the lottery result this time is an out-of-order symbol (S524: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S524: Yes), the opening and closing control start of the motorized role (opening and closing door) attached to the first ball entrance 64a is set (S525). finish.

  When start of the opening / closing control of the motorized part (opening / closing door) is set by the process of S525, the motored part is then executed when the motored part opening / closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 33) is performed. The opening and closing control of the object (opening and closing door) is started, and the opening and closing control of the motorized part (opening and closing door) is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S519 or S521 end. After the process of S525 is executed, a common drawing stop command indicating stop of the normal symbol is set (S526). The common drawing stop command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the normal symbol is stopped.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has normally passed through the symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number M of holding times of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the normal symbol opening (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, based on the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c added in the process of S604, a common drawing holding ball number command is set (S605).

  The general drawing reserve ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) described later executed by the MPU 201. Is sent to the audio lamp control unit 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the common drawing holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the common drawing holding ball number command, and the extracted value is used as the common drawing holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223 d.

  When the process of S605 is completed, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) is displayed as the empty reservation area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 It is stored in the first area among the area to the 4th reserved area (S606). In the process of S606, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 1, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Subsequently, the common drawing prior determination result is acquired based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 stored in the process of S606 and the second per random number table 202d (S607), and the common drawing prior determination based on the common drawing prior determination result A winning information command is set (S608), and this processing ends.

  The general drawing winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 33) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the common drawing prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the common drawing advance determination result from the common drawing prize information command, and stores the extracted value in the common drawing prize information storage area 223 a of the RAM 223. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform an effect based on the common drawing prior determination result.

  Next, the V passage process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S109). This V passage process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), is the passage of the gaming ball to the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) in the second variable winning device 650 normal? Is a process of determining

  In the V-passing process (S109), first, it is determined whether the V detection switch 650e5 provided in the V passage flow path 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 has detected a gaming ball (S701). In the process of S701, when it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 does not detect the gaming ball, that is, when it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 is not set to ON (S701: No), the main process Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S701 that the V detection switch 650e5 has detected the gaming ball (S701: Yes), then within the V passable period currently set as the small hitting scenario (FIG. 16) It is determined whether or not (b) to (c) (S702).

  If it is determined in the process of S702 that it is not within the V-passable period set in the small hitting scenario (S702: No), an error command is set (S703), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S702 that it is within the V passable period set in the small hitting scenario (S702: Yes), the value of the acquired first hit type counter is read (S704) ). That is, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S302 is referred to and compared with the random value defined in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, and the big hit type of the special symbol having two types (big hit A Of the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot A (15R jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (15R (See FIG. 14 (b)).

  Next, the V flag 203f indicating the jackpot type read in S704 is set to ON (S705), and a V passage command is set (S706). Thereafter, the value of the time reduction counter 203d corresponding to the jackpot type and the gaming state is set (S707).

  As described above, even when a small hit game is being performed for a win on the second variable winning device 650, a small win can be achieved by providing a (normal) period and a non-valid (abnormal) period in which the win is valid. It is possible to prevent an act of illegally passing the ball to the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during the hit game.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the V detection switch 650e5 detects a game ball outside the passable period, an error command is set without setting the V flag 203f on, and this processing is ended. Because the V flag 203f is not set to ON even if the game ball passes the specific area outside the passable period, the small hit game even if the game ball is illegally passed to the specific area during the small hit game The jackpot game will not be executed after the end. Therefore, there is an effect that an illegal game can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, a configuration is employed in which it is determined whether the timing at which the game ball passes the specific area is normal, and the presence or absence of an abnormality (error) is used. The configuration of may be used.

  For example, a case where the V detection switch 650e5 detects two or more gaming balls in one small hitting game may be determined as abnormal. In this embodiment, the operation control of each configuration of the second variable winning device 650 in this embodiment makes it possible to make one game ball capable of passing the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) in one small hitting game. Is adopted. Therefore, the case where the V detection switch 650 e 5 detects two or more gaming balls in one small hitting game may be determined as abnormal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the V detection switch 650e5 is determined to detect the game ball, it is determined whether the detection of the game ball (passage of the specific area) is within the passable period, so that the passage is made. It is possible to process the detection of the game ball outside the possible period (the passage of the specific area) as abnormal, but for example, it is first determined whether the present period is within the passable period, and if it is within the passable period It may be configured to determine whether the detection switch 650e5 has detected a game ball.

  Furthermore, during one small hit game based on the detection result of the passage detection switch 650as that detects the ball entering the inflow port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 described above and the V detection switch 650e5 that is the specific area If the V detection switch 650e5 detects the gaming ball despite the fact that the passage detection switch 650as does not detect the gaming ball, it may be determined as abnormal.

  By doing this, for example, it becomes possible to monitor an illegal game in which gaming balls are retained in the V passage flow path 650 e 3 and gaming balls retained in the passable period are allowed to pass to a specific area.

  In addition, a means is provided to determine whether the current small hit game is a V-passable small hit or not, and the result of the determination is used to determine V regardless of the V-impossible (hard) small hit. When the detection switch 650e5 detects a game ball, it may be determined as abnormal.

  In addition, the game ball that first wins the second variable winning device 650 after the small hitting game is executed as in this embodiment enables the plurality of abnormality monitoring processes described above to be able to win the V passage flow path 650e3. It becomes possible to monitor a fraudulent game more reliably by using it.

  In other words, when trying to pass the game ball to the V detection switch 650e5 which is the specific area illegally, the V detection switch despite the fact that the second variable winning device 650 does not win even one ball during the small hitting game When the 650e5 detects a game ball, it becomes possible to determine that it is abnormal, and furthermore, the V detection switch 650e5 detects two game balls when the second variable winning device 650 is made to win even one ball during a small hit game. It becomes possible to determine that it is abnormal.

  In addition, when the small hitting game of this time is the small hitting game which can not pass V, because the game sphere which makes the 2nd variable winning a prize device 650 winning does not pass V detection switch 650e5, V detection switch 650e5 Since the V detection switch 650e5 detects the gaming ball during the small hitting game where the passing gaming ball is one but can not pass V, it can be determined as abnormal.

  When the determination result of each abnormality determination process described above is determined to be abnormal, an error command may be set and output may be possible outside. In this case, the error command may be configured to include identification information capable of identifying the cause of the abnormality and priority information indicating the priority of the generated abnormality.

  Here, the priority information is information for simply determining whether or not the abnormality that has occurred is an abnormality that has occurred due to an illegal game, and, for example, the number of balls won in the second variable winning device 650 ( Abnormality that is determined that the number of balls (V detection switch 650e5) that have passed the specific area is higher than the passage detection switch 650as) is set with high priority information with high priority because the possibility of illegal gaming is high. The abnormality determined that the ball has passed through the specific area outside the passable period in the hit game has a possibility of ball play, and priority information with low priority is set.

  As described above, although any abnormality can not occur in a proper game, by setting priorities in it, when a plurality of abnormalities simultaneously occur in one pachinko machine 10, an abnormality having a high priority. Can be informed with priority, and there is an effect that processing after occurrence of abnormality can be smoothly performed.

  In addition, each abnormality discrimination | determination process with respect to passage of the game ball to a specific area may combine the all, and may combine the one part suitably.

  Here, an error command set when it is determined as abnormal as a result of each abnormality determination process described above is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and a main process to be described later (FIG. In the external output process (S1001) (see 33), the signal is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the audio lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal plate (not shown). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the content of the error is extracted from the error command, and a notification based on the extracted content is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. And using.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 33). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process of 4 millisecond cycle, and the counter updating process of S1011 and S1012 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. In addition, the normal symbol holding ball number command and the common drawing prize information command set in the through gate passage processing (see FIG. 29) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, an opening command set in the big hit control process (see FIG. 34) and a small hit opening command set in the small hit control process (see FIG. 36) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the error command set in the V-passing process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  The external output process of the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that various commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by an external terminal plate (not shown), and various error commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, for example. There is.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and reset to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or 1) A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specified winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). Details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

  After the process of S1004, the small hitting control process is executed (S1005). The details of the small hitting control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the small hitting control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motor-operated article opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motor-operated article 64b attached to the first ball entrance 64a (S1006). In the motorized accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized accessory 64b is set by the process of S524 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 64b is started. The opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 64b is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S516 or the process of S518 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S507). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation display according to the variation pattern. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) is ended. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in a stopped state (lit display).

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S517 or the process of S519 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83 Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S522 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S514 of normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 Turn on).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010) ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process of this time (S1010: No), the predetermined time is reached, ie, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main process, The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1011, S1012).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 31 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  In addition, the processing of S1009 is the timing when the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or the timing when one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of the respective registers used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, in the process of initial setting (S901 in FIG. 32) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be alleviated, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the first variable winning This is a process for opening or closing the first specified winning opening 65a of the device 65.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the process of S209 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) or the process of S1406 of the small hitting ending control process (see FIG. 37) described later is executed to determine whether the big hit scenario is set. Do. That is, the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a big hit, and the big hit scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big hit scenario is based on having passed the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during the small hit game. Determine if it has been set. When it is determined in the process of S1101 that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1101: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1101 that the big hit scenario is set (S1101: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the big hit scenario counter 203g (S1102), and the counter value of the big hit scenario counter 203g is It is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S1103). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (not shown), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is 1. Determine if

  If it is determined in the process of S1103 that the counter value of the big hit scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the opening start (if the big hit scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S1103: Yes), the big hit opening command Are set (S1104), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value not corresponding to the opening start (S1103: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the round start (in jackpot scenario a If there is, it is determined whether the counter value is 1251) (S1105).

  When it is determined in the process of S1105 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1105: Yes), the specified winning opening (first specified winning opening) 65a is opened in the process of S1106. (The specific door solenoid 65f2 is set to ON so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning opening 65a is opened), and then the round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set ( S1107), this processing ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is not the value corresponding to the start of the round (S1105: No), then the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed. It is determined whether the condition is satisfied (S1108). Here, as a closing condition of the specific winning a prize opening (first specific winning a prize opening) 65a in the present embodiment, when 30 seconds have passed after the specific winning a prize opening (first specific winning a prize mouth) 65a is opened, or After the winning opening (first specified winning opening) 65a is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when the ball has won a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  If it is determined in the process of S1108 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is the round currently being executed. The counter value corresponding to the end of the round is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the counter value (S1109), and the present process ends. If it is determined in the process of S1108 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and it is configured not to be determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control process from the next time onward. .

  Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g, and to execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when the closing condition is satisfied by a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls being won in the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, that is, a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) When closing the specific winning combination opening (first specific winning combination opening) 65a, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is configured to be updated to a value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed. (The operation control is configured to be executed in the next jackpot control process).

  By doing this, operation control (for example, operation control for closing a specific winning opening due to a predetermined number of winning balls) is used as a jackpot scenario due to factors that do not accompany time lapse (counter value update) It becomes possible to carry out based on. Therefore, operation control is performed based on the jackpot scenario when a predetermined time has elapsed as a closing condition of the specified winning opening (first specified winning opening) 65a, and when there is a predetermined number of winnings, it is not based on the jackpot scenario. There is an effect that it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as performing operation control, and it is possible to facilitate design and prevent a situation where both operation controls are mixed.

  Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. In the process of S1108, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65 is not satisfied (S1108: No), next, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the round end It is determined whether it is the value (in the case of the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 8750) (S1110).

  If it is determined in the process of S1110 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1110: Yes), the specified winning opening (first specified winning opening) 65a is closed in the process of S1111. The specific door solenoid 65f2 is set to OFF so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning hole 65a is closed, and the process is ended. In addition, the discrimination | determination process to S1105-S1110 mentioned above is repeatedly performed by the number of rounds of the jackpot set to the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1110 that the counter value of the big hit scenario counter 203g is not the value corresponding to the round end (S1110: No), then the counter value of the big hit scenario counter 203g corresponds to the interval start ( If the value jackpot scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1112). When it is determined in the process of S1112 that the counter value of the big hit scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the interval start (S1112: Yes), an interval command is set (S1113), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1112 that the counter value of the big hit scenario counter 203g is not the value corresponding to the interval start (S1112: No), next, the big hit ending control process (S1114) is executed. This jackpot ending control process is a processing performed during an ending period in jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the last round of jackpot game to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. .

  Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1114) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1114). The jackpot ending control process (S1114) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 34).

  In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the start of ending (in the case of jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 40751) (S1201). If it is determined in the process of S1201 that the counter value of the big hit scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the start of ending (S1201: Yes), a big hit ending command is set (S1202), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is not the value corresponding to the ending start (S1201: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is the value corresponding to ending the ending (in jackpot scenario a If there is, it is determined whether the counter value is 42000) (S1203). When it is determined in the process of S1203 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is not a value corresponding to the ending of the ending (S1203: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1203 that the counter value of the big hit scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the ending end (S1203: Yes), the setting of the big hit scenario is cleared (S1204), and then the big hit The scenario counter 203g is reset to 0 (S1205). That is, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is ended. Then, the process ends.

  Next, the small hitting control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the small hitting control process (S1005). This small hitting control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33), and setting of a command for causing the voice lamp control device 113 to execute various effects according to the small hitting, and the second specification The opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 for opening / closing the opening / closing piece 650b attached to the winning opening 650a and the switching valve solenoid 650c2 for turning the switching valve 650b3 for switching the flow path are controlled.

  In the small hitting control process, first, it is judged whether a small hitting scenario is set (S1301). Specifically, the processing of S402 and S403 of the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 27) is executed to determine whether the small hitting scenario is set. If the small hitting scenario is not set in the process of S1301 (S1301: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the small hitting scenario is set in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h (S1302), and the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is small hitting It is determined whether it is the timing of the opening start of the scenario (S1303). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16B), the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the opening start (opening start) has a counter value of 1, so the value of the counter 203h is 1 Determine if it is.

  In the process of S1303, if the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the opening start (if the small hitting scenario a202g1, the counter value is 1) (S1303: Yes), the process of S1304 is small The opening command for winning is set (S1304), and the process shifts to the processing of S1305. Here, in the small hitting opening, a display mode indicating the start of the small hitting game is set in the third symbol display device 81 one second before the opening timing of the opening and closing piece 650b regardless of the small hitting type. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from determining the small hitting type due to the difference in the length of the display mode of the opening. In addition, it may be configured so as to continue to display the combined design effect (a battle between a hero and a monster) effect without displaying the opening effect at the time of small hit. With this configuration, the player recognizes the start of the small hitting game as the opening timing of the opening and closing piece 650b, so that it is difficult to identify the small hitting type.

  On the other hand, if the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is a value not corresponding to the opening start (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1305. In the process of S1305, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is the timing of turning on the switching valve solenoid 650c2 of the small hitting scenario (V passage flow passage 650e3 opened) (S1305). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16 (b)), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the switching valve solenoid on (V passage passage 650e3 opened) is 375. It is determined whether the value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is 375.

  In the process of S1305, if the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is a value for turning on the switching valve solenoid 650c (if the small hitting scenario a202g1, the counter value is 375) (S1305: Yes), the process of S1306 Thus, the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON (the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON so that the switching valve 650b3 pivots downward to open the V passage flow path 650e3). Then, the process proceeds to the process of S1307.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1305, if the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is not the value corresponding to the switching valve solenoid on (if the small hitting scenario a202g1, the counter value is 375) (S1305: No), the process of S1307 Transition to

  In the process of S1307, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is the timing of the switching valve solenoid OFF (V passage flow path 650e3 closed) of the small hitting scenario (S1307). For example, when the small hitting scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16B), the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h corresponding to the switching valve solenoid OFF (V passage passage 650e3 closed) is 1000, It is determined whether the value of the small hitting scenario counter 203 h is 1000.

  In the process of S1307, if the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the switching valve solenoid off (if the small hitting scenario a202g1, the counter value is 1000) (S1307: Yes), by the process of S1308 The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF (to close the switching passage 650e3, the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF so that the switching valve 650b3 pivots upward). Then, the process proceeds to the process of S1309.

  In the process of S1309, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is the timing to start the round of the small hitting scenario (S1309). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16B), the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the round start (round start) has a counter value of 376, so the small hit scenario counter 203h Determine if the value is 376.

  In the process of S1309, if the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the start of the round (if the small hitting scenario a202g1 the counter value is 376) (S1309: Yes), small by the process of S1310 The second specific winning opening 650a is set to open and close based on the winning scenario (set the opening and closing piece solenoid 650f2 to be open so that the opening and closing piece 650b of the second specification winning opening 650a is opened), and to the process of S1311 Transition.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1309, when the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is not the value corresponding to the round start (S1309: No), the process proceeds to S1311.

  In the process of S1311, it is determined whether a round end condition is satisfied (S1311). Here, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total while the second specified winning opening 650a is opened.

  When it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round end condition of the second specified winning opening 650a is satisfied (S1311: Yes), the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is set to 1 from the counter value corresponding to the round end. The value obtained by the subtraction is updated (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1313. If it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round end condition is satisfied, the round end condition is cleared so that it is not determined that the round end condition is satisfied again in the subsequent control. There is.

  Here, the small hitting scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the small hitting counter 203h and to execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value, as in the above-mentioned big hit scenario. There is. Therefore, when the round end condition is satisfied by the predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls being won in the second specified winning opening 650a, that is, the round is ended due to the factor not accompanied by the passage of time (update of the counter value) (When the second specified winning opening 650a is closed), the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed ( Operation control is executed in the next small hit control process).

  By doing this, operation control (for example, operation control for ending a round by having a predetermined number of balls won) based on a small hitting scenario is performed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value). Can be implemented. Therefore, the operation control is performed based on the small hitting scenario when the predetermined time has passed as the round end condition of the second specified winning opening 650a, and the operation control is not based on the small hitting scenario when there is a predetermined number of winnings. There is an effect that it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as to execute, and it is possible to make the design easy and to prevent the situation that both operation control is mixed.

  If it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round end condition of the second specified winning opening 650a is not satisfied (S1311: No), the process proceeds to S1313. In the process of S1313, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the end of the round (if the small hitting scenario a202g1 the counter value is 750) (S1313). When it is determined in the process of S1313 that the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1313: Yes), the second specified winning opening 650a is set to be closed in the process of S1313. (The open / close solenoid 650f2 is turned off so that the open / close piece 650b of the second specified winning hole 650a is closed), and the process proceeds to the process of S1315.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1313 that the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is not the value corresponding to the end of the round (S1313: No), the process proceeds to S1315.

  In the process of S1315, the small hitting ending control process (S1315) is executed. The small hitting ending control process is performed during an ending period in the small hitting game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the small hitting game round to the start of the variation of the special symbol. It is.

  Next, the small hitting ending control process (S1314) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the small hitting end control process (S1314). The small hitting end control process (S1314) is a process executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 36).

  In the small hitting ending control process, first, it is judged whether the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the ending start (in the case of the small hitting scenario a202g1, the counter value is 751) (S1401). If it is determined in the process of S1401 that the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the ending start (S1401: Yes), a small hitting ending command is set (S1402), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is not the value corresponding to the ending start (S1401: No), then the value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h corresponds to the ending of the ending (small hit (small hit) If the scenario is a202g1, it is determined whether the counter value is 1500) (S1403). When it is determined in the process of S1403 that the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is not the value corresponding to the ending of the ending (S1403: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the ending of the ending (S1403: Yes), the setting of the small hitting scenario is cleared and the small hitting scenario counter 203h is reset to 0 ( S1404). Then, the process proceeds to the processing of S1405.

  In S1405, it is determined whether the V flag 203f is set to ON (S1405). If it is determined in the process of S1405 that the V flag 203f is not set to ON (S1405: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V flag 203f is set to ON (S1405: Yes), next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203f set in S705 of FIG. It sets (S1406). Then, the V flag 203 f is set to off (S 1407), and the process ends.

  In addition, in this embodiment, since small hit games are all set as one round games, unlike the big hit scenario which performs operation control of the big hit game, the process which sets the command regarding the number of rounds, and interval period In the case of providing a small hit game having a plurality of rounds without providing a scenario corresponding to the interval period), a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the above-described big hit game may be set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the small hitting scenario is set for the period in which the small hitting game is executed, for example, until the predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the small hitting game ends. You may set a small hit scenario for the target. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to set a V-passing valid period until 1 second has elapsed after the small hitting game is over. Therefore, it becomes possible to set the period set across different gaming states by one scenario, and it is possible to reduce the volume of control processing.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5 in the small hit game, the big hit based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 which has been acquired by the variation that became the small hit Although it was configured to determine the type, without being limited thereto, it is configured to acquire the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the gaming ball by the V detection switch 650e5 and determine the jackpot type May be

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 38, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of the main process is performed by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary stop") in the current start-up process (FIG. 39). It is judged whether or not it has been started during the execution of S1618) (S1502). As described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1615 in FIG. 39), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1618. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1618 is in progress can be determined according to the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1502: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1618 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written by the processing of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is judged that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1618 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1502: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and the voice lamp control device 113 is performed during the execution of the power-down process of S1618. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1504 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1504, the storage area of the whole range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1504). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1506). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1508, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1508). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1618 is performed (see S1617 in FIG. 39). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1618 is executed, the process of S1508 is performed instantaneously when the power-off flag is turned on until the processing of S1508 is performed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S1618 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1509), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510). The permission is set (S2211), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1508 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, so the processing of S1504 to S1506 is performed via S1508. Or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1510, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510). (S1511). And, it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1509 is that, when the process of S1508 is reached through the processes of S1504 to S1506, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1504, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S1601 was performed (S1601), and one millisecond If the above has not elapsed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the process of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is mainly the process relating to display (rendering) in S1602 to S1610, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1612, the fluctuation display setting process of S1613, and the pseudo fluctuation setting process of S1614 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1612 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and the process of S2313 and S1614 is executed in a short cycle to be received by the command determination process. Based on the command, it is possible to set the setting related to the variable effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1603 to S1614 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1602). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1604). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1605 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-held balls display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds), the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed. The setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command. In the holding ball number display update process, a process of lighting the holding lamp (Ds3) is performed according to the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 34 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also performed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1610 is finished, the effect counter 223g is updated (S1611), and the process proceeds to S1612.

  In the process of S1612, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1612). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1613). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S1613, the pseudo variation setting process is executed (S1614). With the pseudo fluctuation, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is newly started during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped during the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol, the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol It is a variation effect performed to match the start timing. The pseudo variation setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 45, but it is determined whether the pseudo variation is to be executed by the fusion symbol even after the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is stopped. Processing is performed.

  When the process of S1614 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1615). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1615 (S1615: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1617), and the power-off process is executed (S1618). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1619), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power-off is not stored in the process of S1615 (S1615: No), it is judged whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1616) If not (S1616: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1616: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a command determination process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1612). This command determination process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1612), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is detected from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1701). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on (S1702), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S1703), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  If the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1704). When the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop command corresponding to the special symbol has been received from the main control device 110 (S1707). When the stop command is received (S1707: Yes), the pseudo change start setting process is executed (S1708), and this process is ended. The pseudo fluctuation start setting process (S1708) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 41. However, if the pseudo fluctuation is set according to the stop timing of the special symbol, the pseudo fluctuation is fused. A process to be executed is executed by the symbol.

  Here, the pseudo change start setting process (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. In the pseudo change start setting process (S1708), first, it is determined whether the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2101). If it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2101: Yes), since the setting of the pseudo fluctuation is set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i, as processing to set the start of the pseudo fluctuation, The processes of S2103 to S2107 are executed. In the process of S2103, the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S2103), and the effect type (continuation effect or out effect, fluctuation period) set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i and the value of the acquired effect counter 223g The pseudo fluctuation pattern is selected from the pseudo fluctuation pattern selection table 222d (see FIG. 18B) in accordance with the effect type (S2104). A display pseudo start command indicating the selected pseudo variation pattern is set (S2105). The display pseudo fluctuation start command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the content of the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern. Thereafter, the pseudo variation flag 223c is set to ON (S2106), and the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to OFF (S2107). Thereafter, this process ends. The pseudo fluctuation pattern is set to be continued for a maximum of 30 seconds in the case of continuation, and the out-of-order pseudo fluctuation pattern is blacked out when the pseudo fluctuation period set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i elapses. It is processed and set to the effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S2101: No), a display stop command is set (S2102), and this process is ended. The display stop command set here is a command indicating stop of the special symbol. Based on this command, the fused symbol and the special figure assist symbol are synchronously displayed in the stop state (confirmed stop display).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the pseudo fluctuation is set at the stop timing of the special symbol (the timing when the stop command is received), the start of the pseudo fluctuation is set. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly execute the pseudo fluctuation and to provide the player with a natural fluctuation of the fusion effect.

  Here, returning to FIG. 40, the description will be continued. In the process of S1707, when the stop command has not been received (S1707: No), it is next determined whether or not the general drawing reserve ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1709). In the process of S1709, when the common drawing reservation ball number command is received (S1709: Yes), the common drawing holding ball number command received in the normal symbol holding ball number counter corresponding to the received common drawing holding ball number command Are stored, and the pending ball number counter 223 j is updated by adding 1 (S 1710). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (the number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is extracted from the received common drawing holding ball number command, and this is used as a voice lamp control device It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223 d of 113. After that, a command for holding ball number for display is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d and the value of the holding number counter 223j (S1711), and this processing is ended. Do.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the display control device 114, the display of the holding symbol is set based on the value of the holding number counter 223j. In the configuration of the present embodiment, as described above, when a specific condition is satisfied, the pseudo variation is executed in the fusion symbol across the variations of the plurality of normal symbols. Meanwhile, in order to make it appear as if it is one change, the display of the holding symbol of the common figure is not subtracted (the “black circle symbol” is reduced (digested) effects are executed), and the number of actual ordinary symbols held A difference occurs with the number of displayed symbols being displayed. However, as will be described later, if there is a difference between the actual number of reserved normal symbols and the number of displayed suspension, special variation is set at the start of the variation of the fused symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbols, 2 A short change which is pseudo-stopped in seconds is executed, the value of the hold number counter 223 j is subtracted at that timing, and the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also updated based thereon. As a result, the difference can be corrected to the normal state, and the problem of giving the player a sense of discomfort can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, although it is configured to make a pseudo stop during the actual variation of the normal symbol, if the suspension corresponding to the next variation in which the difference has occurred is not stored, the fusion symbol is simulated 2 It may be configured to perform an effect of fluctuating 1 second in a second in order to digest a pending difference.

  Here, since the general drawing reservation ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball passes the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 or when the drawing of the normal symbol is performed, the through is through Every time gate passage is detected, or every time a lottery of a normal symbol is performed, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 by the processing of S1710 is the normal symbol holding ball of the main control device 110 It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203c. Therefore, for example, even if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc, detection of passing through gate The value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 at the time of lottery of the time or the normal symbol. In addition, for example, when the processing of S1711 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d and the value of the holding number counter 223j is It is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held balls number symbol according to the value of the number-of-holds counter 223j is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1709, when the common drawing reserve ball number command has not been received (S1709: No), it is next determined whether the common drawing fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1712). Then, when the common drawing fluctuation pattern command is received (S1712: Yes), the common drawing fluctuation start flag 223b is set to ON (S1713), and the common drawing fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received common drawing fluctuation pattern command ( S1714). Thereafter, the process ends.

  In the process of S1712, when the common drawing fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1712: No), it is next determined whether the common drawing winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1715). Then, when the common drawing winning information command is received (S1715: Yes), the winning information based on the received common drawing winning information command is stored in the common drawing winning information storage area 223a (S1716), and this processing is ended. . Here, the winning information includes information based on the respective values of the second random number counter C4 and the common pattern variation type counter CS2.

  In the process of S1715, when the common drawing prize information command is not received (S1715: No), it is determined whether the common drawing stop command is received (S1717). If it is determined that the normal drawing stop command has been received (S1717: Yes), a display normal drawing stop command is set (S1718). The display common drawing stop command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 that it is the stop timing of the common drawing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal drawing stop command has not been received (S1717: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed (S1717) ), End this processing. In the processing of S1719, for example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used in the display control device 114. The setting of the command is performed so as to transmit the command to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the variation display setting process (S1613) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1613). This variation display setting process (S1613) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation presentation, Various variation pattern commands for display are generated and set based on various variation pattern commands received from main controller 110. When the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON, a pseudo change start setting process (see S1708 in FIG. 41) is executed.

  In the variable display setting process (S1613), first, it is determined whether the change start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1801). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S1801: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1804. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S1801: Yes), fluctuation pattern selection processing is executed (S1802). Details of the variation pattern selection process (S1802) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1802 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1803). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, in the process of S1804, it is determined whether the common drawing change start flag 223b provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S1804). When it is determined that the common drawing fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, is off) (S1804: No), since the common drawing fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, Transfer to the processing of S1807. On the other hand, when it is determined that the common drawing fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1804: Yes), the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S1805). The details of the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1805 is completed, a display common drawing fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 is generated based on the acquired common drawing fluctuation pattern type, and the command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 It sets to (S1806). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, in the process of S1807, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S1807). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not on (that is, off) (S1807: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display The setting process ends, and the process of S1812 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S1807: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S1808), and then in the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40) The stop symbol in the middle symbol row of the fused symbol in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is extracted (S1809).

  Next, based on the stop symbol in the middle symbol row of the fused symbol designated by the stop type command from the main control unit 110, the stop symbol in the middle symbol row of the fused symbol of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1810), and a display stop type command is set (S1811). Thereafter, the process of S1812 is performed. The display stop type command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol of the middle symbol row of the fusion symbol.

  In the process of S 1812, it is determined that it is a pseudo stop timing of the pseudo common spread diagram fluctuation (S 1812). When a difference occurs between the values of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d and the holding number counter 223j with the pseudo common spread figure fluctuation, when the fluctuation of the fused pattern corresponding to the normal pattern is set, 2 seconds The symbol is a special variation pattern in which the symbol starts to change again after being falsely stopped at. In the process of S1802, it is determined whether it is the timing of this pseudo stop. If it is determined that it is the timing of the pseudo stop (S1812: Yes), the value of the hold number counter 223j is decremented by 1 and updated (S1813), and the values of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d and the hold number counter 223j Setting the number of balls command for display based on (S1814). Thereafter, this process ends. By configuring in this way, the pending number counter 223 j is decremented by 1 at the timing of the pseudo stop, and the pending symbol is also digested by one. Therefore, it is possible to correct the actual number of reservations and the number of displayed reservations. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1812 that it is not the pseudo stop timing of the pseudo common spread figure fluctuation (S1812: No), this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation pattern selection process (S1802) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection process (S1802). The variation pattern selection process (S1802) is a process executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the variation pattern selection process is executed, first, the variation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S1901), and then, in the process of S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40), the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command The variation pattern type is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1902).

  Then, it is determined whether the pseudo variation flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1903). If it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to ON (S1903: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to OFF (S1904). Next, the end of the pseudo fluctuation is set, a display command indicating the end of the pseudo fluctuation is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (1905), and then the processing shifts to the processing of S1906. . The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1903 that the pseudo change flag 223c is not on (ie, off) (S1903: No), the processes of S1904 and S1905 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1906. In the process of S1906, the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1906). Next, based on the acquired fluctuation pattern and the value of the effect counter 223g, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a or the small hitting fluctuation pattern selection table 222c corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol (S1907).

  When the process of S1907 is finished, it is determined whether the result of determination of the special symbol of the variation is out of order (S1908). If the judgment result of the special symbol of the variation is not out of order (that is, it is a hit) (S1908: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the special symbol of the variation is out of step (S1908: Yes), it is determined whether there is a hit within the 2nd holding of the next normal symbol (S1909). If there is no hit within the 2nd hold of the next normal symbol (S1909: No), this processing ends. If there is a hit within the next 2 normal symbols (S1909: Yes), set the pseudo setting flag 223h to ON (S1910: Yes) and set the continuous pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i for up to 30 seconds ( After the step S1911), the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1805) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this common view variation pattern selection process (S1805). The common drawing fluctuation pattern selection process (S1805) is a process executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection process is executed, first, the common drawing fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S2001), and then it is extracted from the common drawing fluctuation pattern command in the processing of S1714 in the command determination process (see FIG. 40). The common drawing fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2002). After the process of S2002, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d is decremented by 1 and updated (S2003). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S2004). If the special symbol is not in motion (S2004: No), it is then determined whether the pseudo variation flag 223c is set on (ie, whether the fusion symbol is in the process of pseudo variation) (S2006). If it is determined that the pseudo change flag 223c is not set to on (that is, the fusion pattern is not pseudo changed) (S2006: No), next, whether the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to on (that is, Then, it is determined whether or not the start of execution of the pseudo fluctuation is determined (S2007).

  If it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S2007: No), the value of the hold number counter 223j is decremented by 1 and updated (S2008). Here, at the timing at which the common pattern variation pattern selection process (S1805), which is a process for starting a new variation of the normal symbol, is performed, the fusion symbol is not pseudo-varied and the start of the pseudo variation is also determined. If not, since the fusion symbol will also be variably displayed correspondingly at the fluctuation start timing of the normal symbol, the value of the number-of-holds counter 223 j is subtracted and the normal displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The number of symbols is also digested (one erased) and updated.

  It is determined whether the value of the hold number counter 223 j and the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223 d are equal values (S 2009). If it is determined that the value of the holding ball number counter 223d and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d are different values (S2009: No), a pseudo-RiP corresponding to the type of the extracted common drawing fluctuation pattern A variation pattern is set (S2011). Thereafter, the process of S2012 is performed. The pseudo common spread pattern fluctuation patterns are provided corresponding to the respective fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, and temporarily stop after 2 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, and then the fluctuation is resumed. The same variation pattern of the combination pattern as the variation pattern of the corresponding normal pattern is executed. In the present embodiment, during the time-saving game, after temporarily stopping for two seconds, display is performed again for one second and then stopping again.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2009, when it is determined that the value of the holding ball number counter 223d and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d are the same value (S2009: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired Then, based on the common drawing fluctuation pattern type and the value of the effect counter 223g, the common drawing fluctuation pattern type (a fluctuation design of a fused symbol) is selected from the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table 222b (S2010). Thereafter, the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2004, when the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S2004: Yes), and when it is determined in the process of S2006 that the pseudo change flag 223c is set to ON. (S2006: Yes) and in the processing of S2007, if it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2007: Yes), a fluctuation period based on the acquired common drawing fluctuation pattern type is obtained. The variable display of the common drawing auxiliary symbol displayed in the normal symbol display area Ds1 of the three symbol display device 81 is set (S2005), and then the present process is ended. As described above, when the pseudo-variation is executed with the fusion symbol, the variation of the fusion symbol is not started corresponding to the start of the variation of the new ordinary symbol, and the variation is started only with the common figure assistance symbol. Thus, it is possible to suppress the problem that the pseudo-variation of the fused design becomes complicated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this pseudo variation setting process (S1614). The pseudo variation setting process (S1614) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the pseudo fluctuation setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2201). If it is determined that the pseudo variation flag 223c is set to ON (S2201: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the pseudo variation being executed in the third symbol display device 81 has elapsed (S2202) . The fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set in S1911 of FIG. 43 or S2209 or S2212 of FIG. 45, and if this fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2202: No), this End the process and return to the main process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2202, when the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation being executed has elapsed (S2202: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to OFF (S2203), and the suspension of the pseudo fluctuation is stopped by the type command. A stop is set with the set stop symbol (symbol displayed as a middle symbol in pseudo variation) (S2204). Next, a display command indicating the stop of the pseudo variation is set (S2205), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the pseudo change flag 223c is not set to on (ie, set to off) (S2201: No), 5 seconds before the change of the special symbol that is out stops It is determined whether it is (S2206). When it is not determined that 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbol of the outing is stopped (S2206: No), this processing is ended.

  If it is determined that 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbol out of movement is stopped (S2206: Yes), it is determined whether the pseudo setting flag 223h provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2207). If it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2207: Yes), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is not set to on (that is, set to off) (S2207: No), it is determined whether there is a hit within the next normal symbol 2 hold ( S2208). If it is determined that there is a hit within the next 2 normal symbols (S2208: Yes), the continuous pseudo fluctuation is set for a maximum of 30 seconds (S2209). Next, the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2210), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit within the next 2 normal symbols (S2208: No), it is a period during which the variation of the normal symbol to be stopped is executed rather than the timing of the variation of the special symbol It is determined whether or not (S2211). Here, rather than the timing at which the variation of the special symbol stops, the period during which the variation of the normal symbol to be stopped is executed after the variation of the special symbol that is currently changing is executed. Also when stopping later, it is a period during which it is possible to determine that the fluctuation of the normal symbol which will newly start fluctuating during the fluctuation of the special symbol will continue to be fluctuated even after the fluctuation of the special symbol which is currently fluctuating.

  When it is determined in the process of S2211 that it is not a period in which the variation of the normal symbol to be stopped is executed later than the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped (S2211: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a period during which the variation of the normal symbol to be stopped is executed later than the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped (S2211: Yes) In order to make the stop timing coincide, set off false fluctuation by the difference second t1 (see FIG. 10 (a)) from the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol under execution to the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol (S2212) ). Next, the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2213), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by combining and displaying the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol as the variation of 1 by the fusion symbol, it is possible to easily inform the player of complicated gameplay and to easily play the game. It can be done. Furthermore, since the game ball having passed through gate 67 has its flow-down speed reduced upstream of first ball entry port 650a so as to correspond to a period of normal symbol hit by crowon member 660, the game machine allows the game to be played Even in a period in which the ball is not fired, the chance of winning to the first ball entrance 65a is increased.

  Furthermore, if the out-of-order variation of the special symbol is executed, the determination result in the 2 suspension of the normal symbol is determined, and if the holding ball which is a hit is stored, the period longer than the variation ends Since the judgment result of being dislocated is not notified and the pseudo change is executed, the change of the special symbol can be connected and produced by the change of the fusion symbol of 1 change by the hit of the next normal symbol.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S 2301), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2301) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2301) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2401). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2402). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2401.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2402, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2403). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2404), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S2301 in FIG. 46) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2302 in FIG. 46) (S2405), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is ended.

  As described above, when the boot process (S 2301) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234 a 1 of the NAND flash memory 234 a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. Since high processing performance can be maintained, it is possible to easily execute diversified or complicated rendering using the auxiliary rendering unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 47, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2401 includes all the remaining boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2401 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2402. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2403 to S2405 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2401 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2401. After repeating the process of S2402 a plurality of times including the process of S2402, the processes of S2403 to S2405 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2403 to S2405 without performing the processes of S2401 and S2402. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When the boot process ends, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2302). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the video RAM 235 for residence (S2303). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2303, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2304). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller 237, according to the transfer instruction, transmits the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2304, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S2305). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 60A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S4502 in FIG. 60B).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48B), the simplified command determination process (FIG. 48) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) is drawn. 48 (see S2608) and the simplified display setting process (see S2609 in (b) of FIG. 48) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64a, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is voice lamp control from the main control device 110 When it is through the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be displayed immediately during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2305, interrupt permission is set (S2306), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2306, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48 (a), a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified and then the drawing of the image By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 48B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2601), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2601: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so a normal effect image is not the third time pattern, not the power-on image. A command determination process (S2602) is performed to display on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S2603) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2602), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process (S2602), all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57.

  In the display setting process (S2603), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2602), etc., an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2604). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2603) or the simple display setting processing (S2609) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2605). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2606). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2604), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2605) The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2607). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2607, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2601: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2608) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2609) is executed to shift to the process of S2604.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2602) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 49, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2701: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2702). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2703).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2704), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2704: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2705), the process returns to the process of S2701.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S2801).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2801, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2801 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2803), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2804), the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are both set to OFF (S 2805), and the process ends.

  By performing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 50A), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2804 is updated and set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801. At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e by the processing, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is Character ROM 234 or As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2803, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2704 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2706) If there is a display variation type command (S2706: Yes), the stop type command processing is executed (S2707), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2707) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information (the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2901), and the stop type table and the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48B) Is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter updated each time the) is executed, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2902).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2902 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is When set to ON (S2903), the processing of this type-of-stop command is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2902 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2604), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2902 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2903, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2901, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S2902.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S2706 that there is no display type command for stop (S2706: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a hit related command among the unprocessed commands (S2708), the hit related If there is a command (S2708: Yes), a hit related command process is executed (S2709), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the hit related command process (S2709) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the hit related command process. This hit related command processing, the hit related commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 (display jackpot opening command, display number of rounds command, display last round command, display jackpot interval command, display jackpot end command, display It is a process for executing a process corresponding to the small hitting opening command, the small hitting ending command for display, the V-passing command for display).

  In the hit related command processing (S2709), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S3001), and if there is a display jackpot opening command (S3001: Yes) , The jackpot opening command processing is executed (S3002), and the process shifts to the processing of S3003.

  Here, the details of the jackpot opening command process (S3002) will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (a). FIG. 52 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening command processing (S3002). The jackpot opening command processing (S3002) is for executing processing corresponding to the jackpot opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot opening command processing, first, the jackpot opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3101). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the big hit opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102), and based on the set big hit opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3103). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3105), the jackpot opening command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the winning related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3001 that there is no display jackpot opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S3001: No), the process of S3002 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3003. In the processing of S3003, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3003), and if there is a display round number command (S3003: Yes), the round number command processing is executed. Then (S3004), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3004) will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 52 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing (S3004). The round number command process (S3004) is for executing a process corresponding to the round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 3201). Thereafter, null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3202). Then, based on the set number-of-rounds display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3203). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3205), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the hit related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display round number command among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S3003 (S3003: No), the process of S3004 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3005. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether or not there is a final round command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3005). If there is a final round command for display (S3005: Yes), the final round command process is executed. Then (S3006), the process proceeds to the process of S3007.

  Here, details of the final round command processing (S3006) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 (a) is a flowchart showing the final round command process (S3006). The final round command processing (S3006) is for executing processing corresponding to the final round command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the final round command process, first, the final round display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 3301). Thereafter, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302). Then, based on the set final round display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3303). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3305), the final round command processing is ended, and the process returns to the hit related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3005 that there is no final round command for display among the unprocessed new commands (S3005: No), the process of S3006 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3007. In the processing of S3007, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot interval command among the unprocessed commands (S3007), and if there is a display jackpot interval command (S3007: Yes), the jackpot interval command processing is executed. Then (S3008), the process proceeds to S3009.

  Here, the details of the jackpot interval command processing (S3008) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing (S3008). The jackpot interval command processing (S3008) is for executing processing corresponding to the jackpot interval command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot interval command processing, first, the jackpot interval display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 3401). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the big hit interval display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and based on the set big hit interval display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3403). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S3405), the jackpot interval command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the winning related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3007 that there is no display jackpot interval command among the unprocessed new commands (S3007: No), the process of S3008 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3009. In the process of S3009, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3009), and if there is a display jackpot ending command (S3009: Yes), the jackpot ending command processing is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S3011.

  Here, the details of the jackpot ending command processing (S3010) will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 54 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending command processing (S3010). The jackpot ending command processing (S3010) is for executing processing corresponding to the jackpot ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot ending command processing, first, the jackpot ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 3501). Thereafter, null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3502). Then, based on the set jackpot ending display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3503). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S3505), the jackpot ending command processing ends, and the processing returns to the winning related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3009 that there is no display jackpot ending command among the unprocessed new commands (S3009: No), the process of S3010 is skipped to shift to the process of S3011. In the process of S3011, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3011), and if there is a small hit opening command for display (S3011: Yes), the small hit opening command The process is executed (S3012), and the process proceeds to the process of S3013.

  Here, the details of the small hit opening command process (S3012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 (b) is a flowchart showing the small hit opening command process (S3012). The small hit opening command process (S3012) is for executing the process corresponding to the small hit opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the small hit opening command process, first, a small hit opening display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 3601). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the small hit opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set small hit opening display data table (S3603) ). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3605), the small hit opening command processing ends, and the processing returns to the hit related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3011 that there is no display small hit opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S3011: No), the process of S3012 is skipped to shift to the process of S3013. In the process of S3013, it is determined whether or not there is a small hitting end display command among the unprocessed commands (S3013), and if there is a small hitting end command for display (S3013: Yes), the small hit ending command The process is executed (S3014), and the process proceeds to the process of S3015.

  Here, details of the small hitting ending command process (S3014) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing small hitting ending command processing (S3014). The small hitting ending command process (S3014) is for executing the process corresponding to the small hitting ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the small hitting ending command process, first, the small hitting ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 3701). Thereafter, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3702). Then, based on the set small hitting end display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233 h (S 3703). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3704). Then, the demonstration display flag and the determination display flag are both set to OFF (S3705), the small hitting ending command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the winning related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3013 that there is no display small hitting ending command among the unprocessed new commands (S3013: No), the process of S3014 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3015. In the process of S3015, it is determined whether or not there is a V-pass command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3015), and if there is a V-pass command for display (S3015: Yes), V-pass command processing is executed. Then (S3016), the process ends.

  Here, the details of the V-passing command process (S3016) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). S3015 is a flowchart showing V passage command processing (S3016). The V-passing command process (S3016) is for executing a process corresponding to the V-passing command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the V-passing command processing, first, the V-passing display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 3801). Thereafter, null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3802). Then, based on the set V passage display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233 h (S 3803). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3805), the V passage command processing ends, and the processing returns to the hit related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3015 that there is no display V passage command among the unprocessed new commands (S3015: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2708 that there is no hit related command (S2708: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a pseudo start command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2710), for display If there is a pseudo start command (S2710: Yes), the pseudo change display process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the pseudo variation display process (S2711) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the pseudo change display process. The pseudo variation display process is a process for executing a process corresponding to the display pseudo start command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the pseudo variation display process, first, the pseudo display data table of the pseudo variation pattern based on the stop type corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 3901). Thereafter, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 3902). Then, based on the set pseudo display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3903). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3905), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the hit related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2710 that there is no display pseudo start command (S2710: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2712), If there is an image change command (S2712: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2713), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 57A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2713) will be described. FIG. 57 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing (S2713), first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4503) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on. (S4001). Then, among the rear surface image determination flags provided for each rear surface image type (rear surface A, rear surface B), the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the rear surface image change command is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the image type is set to off (S4002), the back image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S4001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4002. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is not resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing (S2604), when it is defined that either the back surface A or the back surface B is displayed by the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image discrimination set in S4002 Based on the flag, the rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2712 that there is no rear surface image change command (S2712: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S2714). For example (S2714: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2715), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2715) will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (b). FIG. 57 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4101, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4102, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in S4102, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2714 that there is no error command (S2714: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2716), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

  In the process of S2701 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes ), The processing of S2702 to S2716 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2701 to S2716 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2701 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701: No ), This command determination processing ends.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2608) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command The variation pattern command process (see FIG. 50 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 50 (b)) which are processes corresponding to the respective commands are extracted and the other commands are Perform processing to discard without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50A) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2801. Also, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, in the process of S2802, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2603) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 58, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S4201: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S4202 to S4204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S4202), S4203 to S4204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S4203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S4301).

  In task processing (S2604), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Decide various parameters necessary for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4204), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S4203 (S4203: No), the process proceeds to S4205.

  At S4205, pointer update processing is executed (S4205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 (b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 4401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S4401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (S4402). As a result, if it is the End information (S4402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S4403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S4405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4406), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S4402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 58, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4206 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S4208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4208: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S4209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S4209: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed and the finalized display is performed, so first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S4210), and then the content is cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4211). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4213). Then, after setting the decision display flag indicating that the decision display effect is on in the on state (S4214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4215) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2604), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S4215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is on in the process of S4209 (S4209: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S4216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S4216: Yes), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 4217), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 4218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that demonstration is being performed in the on state is set on (S4221), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, after the finalized display effect is finished, the third symbol display device 81 automatically performs the demonstration effect when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect start or the opening command is not received. The drawing contents can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S4216, if the demonstration display flag is on (S4216: No), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2609) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, an image of the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect based on the power-on time fluctuation image is finished. Is set to the display data table buffer 233 d.

  60 and 61, the details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2605) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S4502) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S4501, that is, if it is off (S4501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60B, the resident image transfer setting process (S4502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2605) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 60 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process (S4502), first, it is determined whether or not the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S4601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted ( S4601: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer processing of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S4602). In this processing of S4602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4602 (S4602: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4602: Yes), the process proceeds to S4603. Also, as a result of the process of S4601, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4601: No), the process proceeds to S4603.

  In the process of S4603, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4603: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4604), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the video RAM 235 for residence. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing of S4603, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S4603: Yes), the simplified image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4605), and the resident image transfer setting processing is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2608 in FIG. 48B) and the simple display setting process (see S2609 in FIG. 48B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 49 to 57) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 58 and 59) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) (see S4501: No in FIG. 60A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a normal image transfer setting process (S4503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2605) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4205) of the display setting process (S2603) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S4702), and if it is transfer data information (S4702: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S4703, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233 to indicate that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S4705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S6502 (S4702: No), the process of S4703 and S4704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4705. In the process of S4705, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S4705), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S4705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4706).

  In the process of S4706, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4706 (S4706: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4706: Yes), the process proceeds to S4707. Also, as a result of the processing of S4705, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4705: No), the processing proceeds to S4707.

  In the process of S4707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4707: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S4708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S4703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to S4713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4707: No), it is then determined whether the back image change flag is on (S4709).

  Then, if the back image change flag is on (S4709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S4710), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S4711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4713.

  In the process of S4709, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S4709: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S4709, if the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S4713, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4713). The determination in the process of S4713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4713 (S4713: No), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4713 (S4713: Yes), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4714). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S4715), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2606) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2605) (S4801). That is, in the process of S6601, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2604), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2605), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S 4802). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4802, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S4803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 48B) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable entering means (the second variable winning device 650) in which the ball can be won when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small hit). A special area (V detection switch 650e5) which gives the player a privilege by passing the ball in the variable ball entry means, and a guidance state and difficulty in passing the ball to the specific area In the restricted state, an induction means (V gate 650d) which can be changed at predetermined intervals is provided. And, when winning in a specific lottery result continuously, in at least any of the specific lottery results that have been won in a consecutive manner, it is configured to be in a gaming state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area There is.

  This makes it possible to provide the player with a gaming state more advantageous than the case of winning the specific lottery result independently when the player has won the specific lottery result in succession, and the identification is continuously made. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention due to having won the lottery result of.

  In the present embodiment described above, when the player wins continuously for the small win (small win A) which is a specific lottery result, that is, when the ball is won for a specific lottery result continuously, the ball is a specific area. Although the small hit game (advantage bonus game) that is easy to pass through is shown to be easy to execute, if it is a configuration that the advantage bonus game can be easily executed by winning a specific lottery result multiple times, this embodiment You may use structures other than the used structure.

  For example, when a specific lottery result is won a plurality of times in a predetermined order, a configuration may be used in which the advantage bonus game is easily performed. In addition, as a predetermined order, a predetermined order, such as a case where a specific lottery result used in the present embodiment is successively won a plurality of times, a case where a specific lottery result and an outlier are alternately repeated, etc. The specific lottery results include those that are won multiple times. In particular, by presetting the order including the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out as the predetermined order, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the advantageous bonus game advantageous to the player is executed. Since there is a possibility of facilitating the game, there is an effect that it is possible to always give expectation to the player.

  Furthermore, when the player wins a small hit consecutively, the total time of the game time of the small hit game and the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the second small hit of the consecutive small hits is V gate 650 d It is configured not to be an integral multiple of the operation cycle.

  As a result, when small hits occur continuously, the continuous small hits do not cause the sphere to flow down at the same timing with respect to the V gate 650 d operating at a predetermined operation cycle. That is, it is possible to cause the balls to flow down at different timings with respect to the V gate 650 d operating at a predetermined operation cycle by continuously generating small hit games. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where the player wins the small hit game alone when the player wins the small hit game continuously, and the player wins the small hit continuously. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention due to the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the total time of the small hitting game playing time and the variation time of the second special figure fluctuation display among the consecutive small hits, is a time corresponding to an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. On the other hand, the V gate 650 d is configured to be different by at least the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650 d is in the induction state.

  Accordingly, when the V gate 650d is in a restricted state, the timing at which the ball is made to flow down to the V gate 650d in the first small hit game among the continuous small hit games is V in the second small hit game. The timing of dropping the ball to the gate 650d can increase the probability that the V gate 650d will be in the induction state, and when the player continuously wins the small hitting game, the small winning game is won alone. It is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than in the case where the player wins, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming intention due to the winning of a small hit continuously.

  It is preferable that the time to be differentiated be different by an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d by a time (1.5 seconds) or more at which the V gate 650d is in the induction state, but it may be less . As such a configuration, for example, when making the operation period (5 seconds) of the V gate 650 d different from the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650 d is in the induction state, for example, 1 second It is preferable to configure to make the operation cycle of the V gate 650d one cycle (5 seconds) different by winning a small hit continuously a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times).

  By configuring in this way, for example, when five small hitting games are continuously performed, at least one V passable small hitting game is executed among the continuously running small hitting games, so When the player wins a small hit in a row, the player can be provided with a more advantageous gaming state than if the player wins a small hit alone.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a period which is not an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650 d is in the induction state is set as the operation cycle of the V gate 650 d. By doing this, for example, in the successive small hitting game, for the previous small hitting game, the timing at which the V gate 650 d sinks the ball is the time when the V gate 650 d is in the induction state (1.5 seconds Minutes) When the small hitting game to be different is repeated several times (for example, 5 times) (when making a total difference of 1 cycle or more of the operating cycle of V gate 650 d different), also for different operating cycle of V gate 650 d The timing at which the ball is made to flow down to the V gate 650d can be made different in the small hit game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition (seven holding balls is satisfied) is satisfied at the timing when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the continuously hit small hit is executed, the continuously hit small player is the player Is configured to provide an advantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly so as to always satisfy the predetermined condition, and the operation of the game can be improved.

  In addition, although this embodiment showed that seven holding balls were set as predetermined conditions, conditions other than that may be set and the number of holding balls which satisfy | fill a predetermined condition may be changed. In addition, a requirement other than the number of holding balls may be set as the predetermined condition, for example, even if it is determined that the special symbol drawing result is a predetermined drawing result and the gaming state is a gaming state different from normal. It may be defined as a predetermined condition that it is between a predetermined period (for example, a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 50 times) after the specific gaming state such as the big hit game is ended.

  Even with this configuration, the player will play the game eagerly to satisfy the predetermined condition, and the operation of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the case where the player wins in small wins consecutively, it is determined (easy) small hits that can pass the ball in the specific area, and based on the determination result, the continuous small hits period And it is comprised so that a series of rendition (continuation) can be performed using the variation display period of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. By configuring in this way, for example, the first small hitting can not pass the ball in the specific area (hard), and the second small hitting can pass the ball in the specific area. Based on the fact that the current small hit is not possible (hard) to pass the ball through the specific area as an effect corresponding to the first small hit if it is possible (easy) small hit. It is possible to execute an effect (e.g., a chance continuation effect) based on the fact that the small hit of the next time the small hit of the next time allows the ball to pass through the specific area (easy). As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency of executing the effect based on the (hard) small hit that can not provide the player with an advantageous gaming state, and therefore it is possible to suppress the effect the player feels dissatisfied with, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is bored with the game.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where the small winnings performed when the specific lottery result is reached are continuous, it is possible to provide a gaming state more advantageous than the case where the small hitting is performed alone. The configuration may be such that it is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when a small hit is performed alone, based on the small hit being performed a plurality of times.

  For example, within a predetermined period (for example, 8 times which is the upper limit number stored on hold), based on the fact that a small hit is performed multiple times, a gaming state that is more advantageous than when a small hit is performed alone It may be configured to be available. By doing this, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention due to the winning of a small hit frequently.

  In addition, based on the fact that small hits are performed multiple times (for example, small hits and outliers are alternated) in a predetermined order, it is more advantageous than when small hits are performed alone. It may be configured to be able to provide a good gaming state. By doing this, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention due to the winning of a small hit frequently. Furthermore, by defining a predetermined order in combination of small hits and out, it is possible to provide a player with an advantageous gaming state even when out of play as a result of drawing a plurality of special symbols. It has the effect of being able to

  In addition, based on the fact that the small hits are performed multiple times (for example, the small hits and the outliers are alternately performed) in a predetermined order, it is more advantageous than when the small hits are performed alone. When it is possible to provide a good gaming state, as in the special variation time (special variation B to C) of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit described in the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the loose The special fluctuation time may be set to be such that the timing at which a plurality of small hits are performed is different from the opening timing of the guiding means. As a result, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, there is a possibility that the player can be provided with an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, since the player can play the game while expecting an advantageous gaming state to be provided separately from the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the game early effective.

  In this case, it is preferable to unify (at least partially unify) the special variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit and the special variation of the special symbol corresponding to the off. In this way, special effects during continuous rendering are performed when small hits are continuous and when small hits are performed a plurality of times (for example, small hits and deviations alternate) in a predetermined order. The same effect can be made executable as a fluctuation effect of a symbol, and there is an effect that the capacity of display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

  Specifically, the variation time is 5.5 seconds in the case where the number of ball entry stored pending is 5 to 6 in the variation pattern selection table for omission 202c that is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. Define a special fluctuation pattern (outlier special fluctuation pattern). By configuring in this way, for example, while the number of balls stored on hold is reduced to 7 → 6 → 5, small hitting A (first time) → removal → small hitting A (second time) in order of special When the lottery of the symbol is executed, after the first small hitting A is finished, the fluctuation indication (5.5 seconds) of the deviation is executed, and thereafter, the fluctuation indication of the small hitting A (5.5 seconds) ) A small hit A is executed later. Therefore, the interval between the first reaching time of the winning ball V gate of the small hitting A and the reaching timing of the second reaching time of the winning ball V gate of the small hit A is 17 seconds. Since the operation cycle of the V gate 650 d is 5 seconds, the arrival timing of the second small hit A winning ball V gate is the same as that of the V second gate hitting arrival timing of the V gate 650 d. The timing is different from the operation cycle by 2 seconds (delayed by 2 seconds).

  In the example described above, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is configured to be unified in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out and in the case of small hitting, but the variation pattern of the special symbol in the case of out (Variation time) may be a variation pattern having a variation time which is the sum of the special variation B (5.5 seconds) and the small hitting A game time (6 seconds). By doing in this way, even when out-of-range variation is performed as in the example described above, the time required for the out-of-range variation to occur in the small-range variation (variation time of special symbol and small-up game time Can be unified with Therefore, the same continuous effect time can be secured in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is in the order of small hitting A → out → small hitting A and in the case of winning the small hitting A three consecutive times. Therefore, there is an effect that the capacity of display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced by achieving commonality of continuous effects.

  In addition, by making it difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol during the continuous production is a small hit or out, it is possible to give the player an expectation until the end of the continuous performance. There is.

  As mentioned above, although the structure illustrated showed the case of falling off as a lottery result of a special symbol other than a small hit, it is not limited to it, for example, the lottery result of a special symbol is not lost, but a special change It may be small hits (small hits B to C) in which B is not set. In this case, the small hitting game time of the small hitting B to C should be unified with the small hitting A, and it is preferable to achieve commonality of continuous effects.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, by setting the special variation time as the variation time of the special symbol, when the small hitting is continuously executed (when the small hitting is performed a plurality of times), the small hitting is independent. Although it is configured to be able to provide an advantageous gaming state than when it is executed, other configurations may be used, for example, a door 650f (variable means) opened when a small hit is executed is The open period or the open timing may be changed, the operation cycle of the V gate 650 d (induction means) may be changed, or the operation timing of the stopper 650 c may be changed.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set in advance so that when one small hit is executed a plurality of times, the small hit of one of them becomes a small hit that can pass V. However, as an alternative configuration, the operation pattern of the V gate 650d may be set such that one small hit can pass V if the small hit is executed multiple times. . Even if such a configuration is used, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the first embodiment.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the gaming ball having passed through the gate 67 is configured to enter the clune member 660, and during normal fluctuation period of the symbol, the flowing speed (speed to move vertically downward to the game area) It is configured to be easy to enter the first ball entrance 64a in accordance with the period when the symbol is hit normally. In the second embodiment, a rotation holding device 690 is disposed below the through gate 67 in place of the clune member 660. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The rotation holding member 690 is provided with a rotating portion 690c disposed at a position where the first concave portion 690a and the second concave portion 690b which can enter the game ball face each other via the central axis 690z, and the rotary portion 690c The side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are arranged at positions where they can be rotated in a state where the gaming ball enters (retains) the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b. The side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are arranged so as to be open from the top so that the game ball can enter the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b of the rotating portion 690c. Further, when the side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are not disposed below the rotating portion 690c and the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b of the rotating portion 690c is at the lower position, the ball enters the ball. Can be made to flow toward the first ball entrance 64a.

  The rotating portion 690a is configured to rotate clockwise in a front view by a rotating motor (not shown) by a rotating shaft 690z. In this case, when the gaming ball which has passed through gate 67 and enters the first recessed portion 690a or the second recessed portion 690b, which is configured to rotate one turn in 20 seconds, the variation time of normal symbol hits is 10 seconds. Therefore, according to the timing, it is configured to be discharged from the lower side. As in the first embodiment, the discharged game ball collides with the nail KG and the flow-down is delayed, and is distributed to the right or left of the nail KG so as to enter the first entrance 64a. It is configured. In the present embodiment, when the first concave portion 690a or the second concave portion 690b of the rotating portion 690c does not face the upper portion, it flows downward without entering the ball, but it is not limited thereto. It may be configured to be held by the side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 and to stand by until the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b pivots upward. In addition, two concave portions in which the game balls can enter may be further provided to increase the possibility of the game balls entering the concave portions and entering the rotating portion 690c. In addition, a plurality of rotation holding members 690 similar to those of the second embodiment may be arranged so that a plurality of game balls are held in the game area so that the flow-down is delayed.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the start gate 680 is disposed between the clune member 660 and the first ball entry device 64 (above the nail KG) in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The start gate 680 is a start switch for starting the hit game of the normal symbol when the normal symbol is hit. The determination result of the normal symbol is a hit, and after the fluctuation time has passed, and the stop symbol is displayed with a hit symbol, when the start gate 680 passes the game ball, the hit game of the normal symbol is started. In addition, since it is the same as 1st Embodiment as a hit game of the normal symbol started, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  0.5 seconds after passing through the start gate 680, the open / close door of the first ball entry device 64 is in the open state, and ball entry into the first ball entry port 64a becomes possible. The game ball having passed through the start gate 680 collides with the nail KG, and is distributed in the left-right direction of the nail KG to flow down to the first ball-loading device 64. The time required from being passed through the start gate 680 to being guided to the first ball sink 64 is about 0.6 seconds to 1 second, and the period during which the first ball feeder 64 is in the open state The game ball having passed through the start gate 680 is configured to easily enter the first ball entrance 64a.

  In the present embodiment, by arranging the nail KG below the start gate 680, the delay is made to match the timing until the first entrance 64a becomes open, but it is not limited thereto. A rotation holding member as in the second embodiment, a clune member or the like may be disposed, or the ball may be configured to flow downward while in contact with a rubber member or the like in which the flow-down speed of the game ball is reduced. Further, the opening period of the normal game may be set to be as long as 5 seconds or the like, and the delay member may be arranged according to the period.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a schematic view showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, a normal symbol hit flag 203i is added to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The normal symbol hit flag 203i is a flag indicating that the right to start the hit game of the normal symbol is given. When the start gate 680 passes the gaming ball after the normal symbol hit flag 203i is set to ON, the hit game of the normal symbol is started. In addition, in the processing of S527 in the normal symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 66), which is one of the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment, the normal symbol hit flag 203i. , It is set to ON when the hit variation period of the normal symbol is over. In the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 of the third embodiment, the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is a normal symbol The difference is that the variation process 2 (see FIG. 66) is changed. The other processes are the same as in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S111) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 2 (S111). The normal symbol variation process 2 (S111) in the third embodiment differs from the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 24) in that the processes of S519 and S521 are deleted and the process of S527 is added. Do. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The process of S519 and the process of S521 (see FIG. 24) are processes for setting the opening of the first entrance device 64 (setting a hit game for a normal symbol), but in the present embodiment, the start gate 680 is set. When it passes, because it is the constitution where the hitting of the normal design is started, it is deleted, it is constituted so as to be set when it passes starting gate 680 (see S1458 and S1460 in Figure 67). Further, in the process of S527, the normal symbol hit flag 203i is set to ON, and when the game ball passes through the start gate 680, the normal symbol hit game is set to be started. In addition, the process of S527 is a case where it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol set in the process of S522 has elapsed, and further, the case where it is determined that the lottery result is a hit in the process of S524. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, motorized product opening / closing processing 2 (S1020) which is one of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a schematic view showing the contents of the motorized product opening / closing process 2 (S1020). The main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment is the motorized jack opening and closing processing (S1006) in the main processing (see FIG. 33) in the second embodiment. It differs in the point changed into (S1020). The other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the motorized product opening / closing process 2 (S1020 in FIG. 67), first, it is determined whether the normal symbol hit flag 203i is on (S1451). If the normal symbol hit flag 203i is off (S1451: No), whether the motorized part (corresponding to the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64) is in the opening / closing operation (ie, opening or closing to opening operation) Whether or not waiting for) is determined (S1452). If the motorized combination is in operation (S1452: Yes), it is determined whether the opening time has elapsed (S1453). If it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S1453: Yes), the opening / closing operation corresponding to the motorized role is set (S1454). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined No in the process of S1452 and S1453, this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1451 that the normal symbol hit flag 203i is on (S1451: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the start gate 680 (S1455). If it is determined that the start gate 680 has not passed (S1455: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1455 that the start gate 680 has been passed (S1455: Yes), the normal symbol hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1456), and the hour-time counter 203d is 1 or more, That is, it is determined whether the time is short (S1457). If it is determined that the time is short (S1457: Yes), it is determined whether a jackpot game is in progress (S1458). If the jackpot is not inside, the opening period per symbol is set to 2 seconds and the interval is set to 2 times at 1 second (S1459). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is not short in the process of S1457 (S1457: No), or if it is determined that the big hit game of the special symbol is in the process of S1458, the opening period is once in 2 seconds. Set to In addition, the period (opening period) until opening is started is set to 0.5 second regardless of the state.

  As described above, since the hit start of the normal symbol is started when the start gate 680 is passed, the first entry ball slot 64 is also provided to the player who has stopped firing the game ball during the change of the normal symbol. It is possible to suppress the chance of entering the ball, and it is easy to play the game.

  In the example of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the start gate 680 is disposed at a position where the game ball easily passes without providing the clune member 660 or the like, and the game ball is fired early after firing. May be configured to pass through.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 86, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured not to store the storage ball for the special symbol, but the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is configured to store the storage ball for the special symbol as well. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that The same elements and configurations as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 69 to FIG. 72, an example of the display content of the fused symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the holding ball of the special symbol in the fourth embodiment is stored will be described. . FIG. 69 shows the timing (period) at which each variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol is executed in the case where the holding symbol of the normal symbol is stored in three balls and the holding ball of the special symbol is stored in one ball; It is the timing chart which showed the timing (period) which a fusion design changes and displays corresponding to it.

  As shown in FIG. 69, first, the fluctuation display of the fused symbol is started in synchronization with the fluctuation start timing of the normal symbol (see FIG. 6A). As shown in the first embodiment, when it is a hit of the normal symbol, the fused symbol is displayed in the reach display mode (see FIG. 6 (b)), and the period during which the normal symbol is hit The reach display mode is displayed in a period in which the first ball entrance 64a is opened as shown in FIG. 7 (a), and based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, special In synchronization with the start of the variable display of the symbol, the display mode of the super reach is displayed by the fused symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 69, the game ball enters two balls into the first ball entrance 64a during the hit period of the normal symbol in which the first ball entrance 64a is opened, and the holding ball of the special symbol is one ball memory An example of the case is shown. During the special symbol variation display period (during special figure variation A), the hit period of the regular symbol ends, and among the regular symbol retention balls, the variation display corresponding to the first ball's holding ball is the variation symbol of the special symbol It is started in the period being performed (period in which the special figure fluctuation A is performed). In this case, the variable display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is only the blinking display portion, and the auxiliary normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  In the first embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the fused symbol is simulated even after the variation period of the special symbol is ended 5 seconds before the variation start time and the end timing of the variation display. It is configured to execute determination of whether to perform variable display (effect such as shaking). On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, it is configured to determine whether to execute the pseudo change at the start of the change of the special symbol and the end timing of the change display. In the fourth embodiment, the condition for causing the fusion symbol to artificially change is limited to the case where the special symbol holding ball is not stored, and when the special symbol holding is stored, the artificial fluctuation is performed. It is configured not to be. By configuring in this way, the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol (variation of the fusion symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol) can be preferentially executed, and the direct trigger of the start of the jackpot game and Notification corresponding to the variation of the special symbol can be performed with the fusion symbol.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 69, at the timing when the first game ball enters the first entrance 64a, the holding ball of the special symbol is not yet stored, so the variation of the special symbol At the fluctuation timing at the start time (at the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation A), after the fluctuation, it is determined whether or not to execute the pseudo-variation of the fused symbol. Although the details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, when the lottery result in the variation of the special symbol (special figure variation A) is out, there is no holding ball of the special symbol, and the hit within 2 reservations of the normal symbol If the hold which becomes is stored, the execution of the pseudo fluctuation is set (as a reservation set after the fluctuation time of the special symbol is ended). By configuring in this way, if the holding ball which is a hit of the normal symbol is stored in the second holding, even after the end of the variation of the special symbol, the first ball entrance 64a is immediately opened, and the special symbol Even if the fluctuation of (the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a) is started, the front fluctuation of the fusion symbol is continuously executed by the pseudo fluctuation, so it is linked with the fluctuation, next It is possible to execute the variation of the fusion symbol in synchronization with the variation of the special symbol started, reduce the number of variations of the fusion symbol for notifying the lottery result of the out-of-lot, and make the player think that the probability of hitting is high. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the example shown in FIG. 69, at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (at the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation B), since the holding to be hit in the 2 suspension of the normal symbol is not stored, the pseudo fluctuation is not set. At the timing when the fluctuation period of the special symbol stops (the timing when the fluctuation period of the special fluctuation B has elapsed), it is determined whether or not the setting of the pseudo fluctuation is performed. In addition to the same determination as at the start of the change being performed, if the holding ball of the special symbol is not stored, and if the holding to be hit is also stored within the 2 holding of the normal symbol, the special symbol Even after the stop of the symbol, it is determined whether or not the variation of the normal symbol is continuously executed, and if it is continuously executed, the pseudo variation of the fused symbol is set until the timing when the variation ends. In the example shown in FIG. 69, since the holding ball corresponding to the special figure fluctuation B is stored at the timing when the special figure fluctuation A stops fluctuating, no pseudo fluctuation is set, and the fusion symbol is also displayed in the reach display mode The middle symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the reach symbol (left and right stop symbol) being played, and the player is notified that the lottery result is out.

  When the variation of the special figure variation A stops, the variation display of the fusion symbol which has been stopped and displayed in synchronization with the start of the variation of the special figure variation B is started. The fusion symbols are scrolled at a high speed (a speed at which each symbol can not be visually recognized) after each symbol row is scrolled in the vertical direction at a low speed (a speed at which each symbol can be visually recognized). Ru. At the start of the variation of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the setting of the pseudo variation is performed similarly to the special variation A. In the example shown in FIG. 69, when the special figure fluctuation B is started to change, the holding ball of the special symbol is not stored, but the holding ball that hits within 2 holdings of the normal symbol is not stored either Therefore, no pseudo-variation is set.

  The variation display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special figure variation A is displayed from the start of the super reach (see FIG. 7 (b)), but in the variation display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special figure variation B, the stop of the fusion symbol After the variable display is started from the state as described above and the reach display is performed, the specific change pattern in which the super reach display mode is displayed is set. In this case, since the variation time of the special symbol is determined on the main control unit 110 side, is the variation pattern selection table 222a of the voice lamp control unit 113 a variation performed by the holding ball? The variation pattern of the fusion design in which the start of the super reach is executed according to the variation time that can be selected according to whether or not they are selected (the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a with no holding ball Will be selected if it is started) and the variation pattern of the fusion symbol will be stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result via the reach display mode, which is variably started from the state where the fusion symbol is in the stop state It is done.

  By configuring in this way, the fusion that has been executed so far is when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts to fluctuate due to the holding ball and when the fluctuation starts when the ball enters the first entrance 64a. The variation display of the corresponding fusion symbol can be performed according to the variation state of the symbol (the difference between when displayed in the reach state and when displayed in the stopped state), and it is possible to suppress the problem of giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  In addition, it is possible to adjust the start timing of the variation of the fusion symbol to the timing to start the variation of the normal symbol, or to match the timing to start the variation of the special symbol, and further, the timing of stopping the variation of the fusion symbol Since it is possible to match the timing to stop the variation of the normal symbol or to the timing to stop the variation of the special symbol, the player can be interested in the variation display of the fusion symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the content of variation of the fused symbol in the case where the holding ball which is a hit is held within the 2 symbol of normal symbol at the start of variation of the special symbol will be described. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing the variation timing of the fusion symbol when the holding ball that is in contact with the normal 2 symbol is stored at the start of the variation of the special symbol (at the beginning of the variation of the special figure variation C). is there. In the example shown in FIG. 70, three balls of the holding ball are stored in the normal symbol, and the holding ball in which the second stored ball becomes a hit is stored. During the fluctuation (during fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation C), the fluctuation of the normal symbol is a hit, and when the first entrance 64a is opened, the game ball enters two balls into the first entrance 64a, It is an example shown about the change mode of the fusion pattern in, when the holding ball of a special symbol is memorized by one ball. At the start of the change of the special figure fluctuation C, the holding ball which hits in 2 reservations of the normal symbol is stored, and at the start of the change (at the start of the change of the special figure fluctuation C), the holding ball of the special symbol is still memorized It is not determined that it has been done (even if the first ball entry 64a is entered continuously, even before the game ball entered later is identified, the process of setting the start of variation of the special symbol is Since it is executed, it is set so that the pseudo variation of up to 30 seconds after the end of the special figure variation C is executed in the fusion pattern. On the other hand, the special symbol corresponding to the special figure fluctuation D from the main control unit 110 after the fluctuation start setting of the special symbol is made (the start setting of the pseudo fluctuation (including the process of turning on the pseudo setting flag 223h) is made). When the hold command of (1) is received, the start setting of the set pseudo fluctuation is canceled (a process of setting the pseudo setting flag 223h to OFF).

  In the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special figure variation C, the display mode from the start of the super reach is displayed in the same manner as the special figure variation A described in FIG. At the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation C elapses (the fluctuation period ends), the fluctuation display of the fused symbol is also stopped and displayed. In addition, since the example in the case where the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation C is out is shown, in the fusion symbol, a symbol different from the reach symbol indicating that the lottery result is out is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row (See FIG. 8 (a)). It is determined whether the pseudo change is to be made at the end timing of the change time of the special view change C, and in the example shown in FIG. 70, the holding ball of the special symbol is stored. Configuration is not performed.

  Next, based on the fluctuation start timing of the special figure fluctuation D, it is judged whether or not the setting of the pseudo fluctuation is executed, and in the example shown in FIG. 70, in the example shown in FIG. Because a holding ball is stored, a pseudo fluctuation of up to 30 seconds is set to be executed after the end of the special figure fluctuation D. In this case, since the winning game corresponding to the suspension 2 of the normal symbol is executed in the variation period (including the pseudo variation period) of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special figure variation D, the third symbol display in the variation period of the fusion symbol The apparatus 81 is set to display a notice display mode for notifying in advance that a hit game with a normal symbol will be executed (an open notice is set). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (b) three seconds before the hit game of the normal symbol, the characters “play the game ball and hold charge chance !!” It is set to be displayed in the layer on the front side rather than). The notice display mode shown in FIG. 72 (b) is a display mode executed during the variation period of the special symbol, and it is informed that the holding balls increase when the game balls are fired. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), the game ball is fired during the period in which the pseudo change is being performed (the state without the holding ball of the special symbol) after the change period of the special symbol is over. Then, a display mode of "replay game balls and have a re-chance chance !!" is displayed as a preliminary display mode indicating that the fusion symbol is re-varied. As shown in FIG. 70, when the notice display mode is set from the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol over the pseudo fluctuation period, the notice display manner is switched and displayed at the timing when the pseudo fluctuation occurs. It is done.

  By configuring in this way, the player who has stopped firing the game ball during the variation period of the fusion symbol will hit the normal symbol and enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64a. It is possible to suppress a defect that misses an opportunity. In addition, in this embodiment, when the change display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the change of a special symbol is performed, it set to display a notice display mode, when becoming a hit of a normal symbol, but it is a special symbol When the number of holding balls is the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment), the advance notice display mode may not be set. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player shoot the game ball uselessly, and to reduce the problem of losing profits.

  In the present embodiment, the advance notice display mode is switched between the variation period and the stop period of the special symbol, but a period in which the first ball inlet 64a opens (corresponding to the opening period shown in FIG. 70) And the preview display mode may be switched. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that it is a period in which the game ball can enter the first entrance 64a, and the player enters the first entrance 64a. It can increase the degree of expectation to

  At the timing when the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation D ends, it is determined whether the setting of the pseudo fluctuation is to be performed, and since the setting of the pseudo fluctuation is already performed at the start of the fluctuation, a maximum of 30 based on the setting. A second pseudo-fluctuation (see FIG. 8 (b)) is performed. As already described in the first embodiment, when the first ball entrance 64a enters the ball, based on the newly started fluctuation of the special symbol, re-variation of the fusion symbol is also started Ru. On the other hand, even if the opening period of the normal symbol (including the ball discharging period which is the period until the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a and is detected by the detection switch) ends, the first ball entrance 64a When the game ball is not detected by the detection switch for detecting the game ball that has entered the ball, the pseudo fluctuation (variation display) of the fusion symbol is displayed as a fixed stop. In addition, as for special design fluctuation B, as for special design fluctuation B, the scroll display is started from the state where the fused design is stopped and displayed, and through the reach display mode, the display mode of super reach is displayed. Is executed.

  Moreover, although the variable display of a special symbol has been described as an example of becoming a super reach in the present embodiment, a non-reach out-of-reach condition may be set as the reach, or variations corresponding to the judgment result of various special symbols. It may be configured in an aspect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the holding ball of the special symbol starts to change and the holding ball is not stored, the first ball entry port 64a enters the ball and the fused symbol corresponding to the normal symbol Since the change mode is switched and set according to the case where the change (scroll display) is being executed and the display is switched to the change of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol, the fusion symbol starts the change display A series of effects can be changed and executed in the same flow every time until it is notified whether or not to be hit (a determination result of a special symbol) (Scroll display is started from the stop state of the fused symbol, and through reach display mode , A flow in which the middle symbol same as the reach symbol is stopped and the hit is notified by the eyes). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In addition, when the holding ball of the special symbol is stored, when the lottery result for the fluctuation is out, the fusion symbol is changed and displayed over the fluctuation period of the special symbol stored in the holding ball. It may be configured to perform one variable display to make it perform. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the number of times the fusion symbol is dislocated and stop, and to make the player think that the frequency of being notified in the hit is higher than the probability of the actual hit.

  Moreover, you may be comprised so that 1 fluctuation | variation of a fusion symbol may be performed over the period which performs several continuous fluctuation | variation display of a normal symbol. By thus configuring, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the fusion symbol stops due to coming off by connecting the variation time to the holding ball of the normal symbol serving as a hit and setting it within one variation of the fusion symbol. Furthermore, the variation time corresponding to the deviation of the normal symbol may be shortened so that a plurality of deviation variations can be completed in a short period of time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71 to FIG. 72, the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 (a) is a view showing a display area in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. The display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment is the ordinary display area actual number display region Ds4 below the normal symbol display region Ds1 with respect to the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. However, the difference from the first embodiment is that the special figure reservation actual number display area Ds5 is added to the lower part of the special symbol display area Ds2, and the common drawing reservation number display area Ds3 is changed to the fusion reservation number display area Ds6. Do. The description of the same configuration is omitted.

  The common drawing reserved actual number display area Ds4 is a display area in which a notification form indicating the reserved number of normal symbols is displayed. In the present embodiment, "a" is when the pending number is 0, "b" when the pending number is 1, "c" when the pending number is 2, and the pending number is In the case of three, “d” is displayed, and in the case where the number of reservations is four, “e” is displayed (see FIG. 71B). As described above, by displaying the symbols, it is configured that the actual number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols is difficult for the player to understand at first glance. By configuring in this manner, in the present embodiment, the case where the number of suspension is different from the number of suspension displayed in the fusion suspension number display area Ds6 described later by the execution of the pseudo fluctuation etc. is different. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the situation, and the player can play a game by recognizing the pending number displayed in the fusion pending number display area Ds 6 as the actual pending number.

  Further, in the special figure actual holding number display area Ds5, the number of holding special symbols is displayed. In the display shown here, the number of reservations is notified in the same display form as that displayed in the above-mentioned common-view reservation actual number display area Ds4. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand the actual number of reserved special symbols for the player, and it is a variation display corresponding to a normal symbol that the fusion symbol is scrolled and changed. It is hard to understand whether it is a variable display corresponding to a symbol. Therefore, the player can concentrate only on the result notified by the integrated symbol, and can play the game without understanding complicated game characteristics.

  Here, the holding symbol displayed in the fusion holding number display area Ds6 will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (b). Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and storage is newly stored, the "black circle" symbol is displayed in the fusion storage number display area Ds6, and the right (storage) the fusion display is variably displayed. It is informed that it is stored. A maximum of four "black circles" symbols can be displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, and it can be informed that the number of times the fusion symbol changes is 4 times. The game ball enters the first ball entrance 64a while the special symbol is changing in a state in which the "black circle" symbol is displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, that is, in a state in which the normal symbol suspension is stored. When the holding ball of the special symbol is stored, the color of the holding symbol of the holding symbol (the holding symbol with the earliest variation order) stored first is changed as shown in FIG. 71 (b) Displayed (eg, red, etc.). By configuring in this way, after the special symbol in motion is stopped changing, the suspended special figure fluctuation is started, but the reserved symbol displayed at that timing is digested (the displayed top row Can be displayed by sliding the display position of the holding symbol that is displayed after the next. In addition, when the holding symbol which has already been variably displayed is displayed, the holding symbol currently displayed in the non-variable state (“black circle” symbol) displayed next is variably displayed. . In addition, when there is no holding symbol currently displayed next, the newly changed holding symbol is displayed and displayed. When the reserved symbol is not displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, the newly changed reserved symbol is similarly displayed even when the reserved special symbol is stored.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to update (digest) and display the holding symbol displayed in the fusion holding number display area Ds6 in accordance with the change start timing of the special symbol, thereby suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Can provide a played game. Furthermore, when the holding ball is stored in the special symbol, the color of the holding symbol is displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. In the present embodiment, since the lottery probability for winning a special symbol is set higher than the lottery probability for hitting a regular symbol, the actual jackpot expectation is also set high. In the present embodiment, although the color of the holding symbol is configured to be variable, the color of the holding symbol has a different expectation (for example, red is the expectation) based on the lottery result of the holding ball of the special symbol. , And blue may be low, etc.).

  In addition, although this configuration causes a difference between the actual number of reservations of normal symbols and the number of reservations displayed in the fusion number-of-retentions display area Ds6, if a difference occurs, the deviation of the normal symbols will vary Execute the pseudo continuous variation with pseudo stop by the variation of the fused symbol displayed corresponding to the variable symbol, and digest the reserved symbol displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6 at the timing of changing again after the pseudo stop timing Thus, the difference in the number of pending items can be matched.

  In the present embodiment, although the maximum number of pending items displayed in the combined pending number display area Ds6 is four, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the upper limit number of eight is the actual pending symbol number and the special symbol number You may comprise so that it may respond | correspond and alert | report. In this case, it may be configured to update the holding symbol of the fusion holding number display area Ds6 displayed at the timing when the special symbol changes and the timing when the normal symbol starts changing.

  FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the notice display mode in the case where a normal symbol is hit during the variation period of the special symbol (including the pseudo variation period) as described above, and Since it is as having done, the detailed explanation is omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. The other points are the same as in the first control example, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. The difference between the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 73 (b). The other points are the same as in the first control example, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 73 (a) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment. A special symbol holding ball storage area 203j and a special symbol holding ball number counter 203k are added to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment, as compared with the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203j has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, the first random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C2 The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the small hitting type counter CS3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64a, and the acquired data includes four reserve areas ( Among the vacant areas of the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when the lottery of the special symbol is performed, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j are the special symbol It is shifted (moved) to the holding ball execution area 203a, and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed .

  In addition, when data are shifted from the reserved first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j to the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins to the first entrance 64a (start winning), and as soon as each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 is obtained according to the starting winning, the values are included. The special figure winning information command (big hit, losing reach or losing winning information command) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the special figure winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 determines each counter C1 to C3, from the special figure winning information command (big hit, losing reach or losing winning information command). Each value of CS3 is extracted and stored as special figure prize information in the special figure prize information storage area 223k of the RAM 223.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203k is a variation display of the special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64a (start winning combination) (performed by the third symbol display device 81) This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waits) of the variable display) up to four times. The initial value is set to zero, and the value N of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203k is set to zero every time the ball enters the first entrance 64a and the number of holding balls of the special symbol increases. One is added to four (see S424 in FIG. 76), and one is subtracted each time variation display of a special symbol is newly executed (see S223 in FIG. 75).

  When the ball wins to the first entrance 64a (start winning), if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is less than 4, the first random number per hit Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j (FIG. 76) S426). On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k is 4 when the ball wins to the first ball entrance 64a (start winning), nothing is newly stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j. Not (S423 in FIG. 76: No).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S224 in FIG. 75 and S425 in FIG. 76). The special figure holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 controls the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k every time the value of the special ball holding ball number counter 203k is changed, the special symbol holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 It is possible to obtain the value of the number of holding balls itself of the variable display. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special figure holding ball number counter 223 m of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, the deviation can be corrected by the special figure holding ball number command to be received next.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the special drawing holding ball number command, and notifies the display control device 114 of the holding ball number of the special drawing whenever the number of holding balls changes. Send ball number command for display for display. The display control device 114 displays the special figure holding ball number pattern in the special figure holding actual number display area Ds5 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding ball number of the special drawing notified by the display holding ball number command. indicate.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73 (b), the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 73 (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. Compared to the first embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment has the special figure winning information storage area 223k, the special figure holding ball number counter 223m, the special figure pseudo fluctuation flag 223p and the special figure pseudo setting The flag 223 q has been added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special figure winning information storage area 223k has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning combination for the first ball entry port 64a is detected in the main control unit 110, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2, which are obtained according to the start winning combination. And from each value of small hitting classification counter CS3, various information which is obtained when drawing of the special symbol which corresponds to the starting winning a prize is done (big hit or small hitting classification in case of yes or no, big hitting or small hitting, fluctuation pattern) Are predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is sent from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 by the special view prize information command (big hit, missed reach, or missed prize information command). Be notified.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the special figure winning information command is received, the various information (the jackpot or small hitting type in the case of hit, big hit or small hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the special figure winning information command is The prize information is extracted as prize information, and the prize information is stored in the special figure prize information storage area 223k. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223m is a special symbol variation effect (variation) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which is a display) and which counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variation effect of the special symbol held in the main control unit 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the special figure holding ball number command output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the special drawing holding ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and the special drawing holding ball number is counted by the special drawing holding ball number counter 223m. Is supposed to manage.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the start winning combination is detected and the number of holding balls in the variable display is added, or in main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of held balls is subtracted. If the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k has been added or subtracted, a special figure holding ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k of the main control device 110 from the special figure holding ball number command. Then, it is stored in the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m (see S1736 in FIG. 81). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m according to the special drawing holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball of the main control device 110 is stored. The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the number counter 203k.

  The value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is used for displaying the special figure reservation ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special figure holding ball number counter 223m in response to the reception of the special figure holding ball number command, and the special drawing holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223m, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the holding ball number corresponding to the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special view holding ball number counter 223 m of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the symbol in the special figure reservation actual number display region Ds5 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the number of special drawing reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol held ball number counter 203k of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. In addition, illustration and its description are abbreviate | omitted about the process similar to 1st Embodiment, and illustration and its description are demonstrated only about a different control process.

  The timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process 2. The timer interrupt process 2 (FIG. 74) is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment in that the special symbol variation process (S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) and the special symbol The difference is that start winning processing (S105) is added after the fluctuation processing 2. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. Details of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S120) and the start winning processing (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.

First, with reference to FIG. 75, special symbol variation processing 2 (S120) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S120). The special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 75, S104) in the fourth embodiment is the process from S203 to S204, which is the process of S221 to S225, to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 25, S104) in the first embodiment. It differs in that it has been changed to. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.
In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired ( S221). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k is larger than 0 (S222), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k is 0 (S222: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k is not 0 (S222: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S223). A special figure holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k is set (S224). The special figure holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k from the special figure holding ball number command, and the extracted value is used as the special figure holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store at 223 m.

  After setting the special figure holding ball number command by the process of S224, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the pending first area to the pending fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 74), and it is determined whether or not the first ball entrance 64a has a winning (start winning), and there is a start winning. Is a process for executing hold processing of values indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64a (start winning) (S421). Here, the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64a (S421: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S422) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S423).

  And if there is no winning on the first entrance 64a (S421: No), or if there is a winning on the first entrance 64a, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k is less than 4 If not (S423: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64a (S421: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203k is incremented by 1 (S424). Then, a special figure holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k changed by the calculation is set (S425).

  The special figure holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k from the special figure holding ball number command, and the extracted value is used as the special figure holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store at 223 m.

  After setting the special figure reservation ball number command by the process of S425, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per counter updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process 2 described above Each value of the random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter CS3 is stored in the first area among the vacant reserved areas (pending first area to the fourth reserved area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j of the RAM 203 (S426) . In the process of S426, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203k is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area. Thereafter, the process of S427 is performed.

  In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S426 is determined to be a big hit at the start of fluctuation. Whether the gaming state at the start of the change is the high probability gaming state or the low probability gaming state is determined from the determination result of the holding ball stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j, and the judgment of success or failure is Perform in advance (preliminary judgment of the judgment result). In the process of S427, not only the result of determination of success or failure, but also the type of stop and the variation pattern are determined and stored in the corresponding holding area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j.

  In the process of S427, when it is determined that the jackpot is (S427: Yes), a jackpot winning information command which is a kind of winning information command is set based on the stop type and the variation pattern (S428). Here, for example, if the jackpot A and the super reach, the jackpot winning information command corresponding to it is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S427 that there is a loss (S427: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern is a super reach (S429). In the process of S429, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is the super reach (S429: Yes), an outreach reach winning information command which is a kind of winning information command is set (S430). On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern different from the super reach (S429: No), a losing winning information command which is a kind of winning information command is set (S431). The winning information command is configured such that the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can identify the type of the variation pattern to be selected.

  The winning information command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when it is set.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77 to FIG. In addition, illustration and its description are abbreviate | omitted about the process similar to 1st Embodiment, and illustration and its description are demonstrated only about a different control process.

  The main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 2. In the main process 2 (FIG. 77), the command determination process (S1612) is changed to the command determination process 2 (S1620) with respect to the main process (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, and the variation display setting process (S1613) is This is different from the variation display setting process 2 (S1630) in that the pseudo variation setting process (S1614) is changed to the pseudo variation setting process 2 (S1640). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. Details of the command determination process 2 (S1620), the variable display setting process 2 (S1630), and the pseudo change setting process 2 (S1640) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 to 86.

  First, with reference to FIG. 78, the command determination process 2 (S1620) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 2 (S1620). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, S1620) in the fourth embodiment, the pseudo variation start setting process (S1708) is a pseudo variation start setting process in contrast to the command determination process (FIG. 40, S1612) in the first embodiment. 2 (S1720), the process of S1709 to S1711 is changed to the process of S1729 to S1730, and the process of S1715 to S1716 is changed to the process of S1731 to S1732. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S1707, when the stop command is received (S1707: Yes), the pseudo change start setting process 2 is executed (S1720), and this process is ended. This pseudo change start setting process 2 (S1720) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 79. However, if the pseudo change is set according to the change stop timing of the special symbol, the pseudo change A process of executing (see FIG. 8B) with the fusion symbol is executed.

  Here, the pseudo change start setting process 2 (S1720) will be described with reference to FIG. The pseudo fluctuation start setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S1720) in the fourth embodiment is the same as the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (FIG. 41, S1708) in the first embodiment except for the process of S2120, S2120 and S2107. The difference is that the process of S2102 is executed after the process of. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of S2101 that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (that is, the setting of the pseudo variation is not executed) (S2101: No), the pseudo setting process at the time of variation stop is executed ( S2120), this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 80, the fluctuation stop pseudo setting process (S2120) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable stop time pseudo setting process (S2120). In the fluctuation stop time pseudo setting process (FIG. 80, S2120), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped is the deviation of the special symbol (S2121). If it is determined that a special symbol has been hit (S2121: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is off (S2121: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special figure holding ball number, that is, the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is 0 (S2122) ).

  If it is determined in the process of S2122 that the value of the special figure holding ball number is not 0, that is, 1 or more (S2122: No), this process is ended as it is. Here, in the present embodiment, when the holding ball of the special symbol is stored, since the variation of the special symbol is started continuously after stopping the special symbol, it is not necessary to execute the pseudo variation etc. The setting of the pseudo fluctuation is not performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure holding ball number is 0 (S2122: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the 2nd holding of the next normal symbol (S2123). If it is determined that there is a hit within the 2nd holding of the next normal symbol (S2123: Yes), the continuous pseudo fluctuation is set for a maximum of 30 seconds (S2124). Next, the process proceeds to step S2127. As described above, when there is no holding ball for the special symbol, and the result of the decision on the special symbol to be stopped is also out, the fusion symbol is also stopped in a mode to notify the detachment, but the normal symbol 2 If there is a hit in the hold, it can be integrated and displayed with the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the next special symbol by extending it by the pseudo-variation that it is fixedly stopped in the detachment mode until then. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the informing result of the fusion symbol is dislocated and stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit within the next 2 normal symbols (S2123: No), it is a period during which the variation of the normal symbol to be stopped is executed rather than the timing of the variation of the special symbol It is determined (S2125). Here, rather than the timing at which the variation of the special symbol stops, the period during which the variation of the normal symbol to be stopped is executed after the variation of the special symbol that is currently changing is executed. Also when stopping later, it is a period during which it is possible to determine that the fluctuation of the normal symbol which will newly start fluctuating during the fluctuation of the special symbol will continue to be fluctuated even after the fluctuation of the special symbol which is currently fluctuating.

  If it is determined in the process of S2125 that it is not a period in which the variation of the normal symbol to be stopped is executed later than the timing at which the variation of the special symbol stops (S2125: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a period in which the variation of the normal symbol to be stopped is executed later than the timing at which the variation of the special symbol stops (S2125: Yes), the pseudo variation setting process of the first embodiment (FIG. 45) , S1214 in S1614), the variation of the normal symbol during execution and the variation of the special symbol during the execution of the variation of the special symbol during the execution of the variation of the normal symbol so that the stop timing of the variation of the normal symbol coincides with the stop timing of the variation It sets by the difference second t1 (refer FIG. 10 (a)) until it is complete | finished (S2212). Next, the process proceeds to step S2127.

  In the process of S2127, the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S2127), and the effect type (the effect of continuation or the effect of distraction, the fluctuation period) set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i and the value of the acquired effect counter 223g The pseudo variation pattern is selected based on the pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d (see FIG. 18B) according to the effect type (S2128). Then, a display pseudo start command indicating the selected pseudo variation pattern is set (S2129). The display pseudo fluctuation start command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the content of the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern. Thereafter, the pseudo variation flag 223c is set to ON (S2130), and the process ends. The pseudo fluctuation pattern is set to be continued for a maximum of 30 seconds in the case of continuation, and the out-of-order pseudo fluctuation pattern is blacked out when the pseudo fluctuation period set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i elapses. It is processed and set to the effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by combining and displaying the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol as the variation of 1 by the fusion symbol, it is possible to easily inform the player of complicated gameplay and to easily play the game. It can be done. Furthermore, since the game ball having passed through gate 67 has its flow-down speed reduced upstream of first ball entry port 650a so as to correspond to a period of normal symbol hit by crowon member 660, the game machine allows the game to be played Even in a period in which the ball is not fired, the chance of winning to the first ball entrance 65a is increased.

  Furthermore, if the out-of-order variation of the special symbol is executed, the determination result in the 2 suspension of the normal symbol is determined, and if the holding ball which is a hit is stored, the period longer than the variation ends Since the judgment result of being dislocated is not notified and the pseudo change is executed, the change of the special symbol can be connected and produced by the change of the fusion symbol of 1 change by the hit of the next normal symbol.

  Referring back to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. After the variable stop time pseudo setting process (S2120) is performed, the process of S2102 is performed. Here, when the special symbol is stopped and the pseudo-variation is performed, a command indicating that the pseudo-variation is executed, and when the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed without the pseudo-variation, the fusion symbol is displayed and stopped. The indicated commands are set as display stop commands (S2102). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. In the process of S1707, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S1707: No), it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command of plain view (normal symbol) or special view (special symbol) is received ( S1729). If it is determined that the holding ball number command of the general drawing or the special drawing is received (S1729: Yes), a holding ball number command reception process is executed (S1730). In the holding ball number command reception process (S1730), when the command indicating the holding ball number of the general drawing and the special drawing is received, the processing of updating and storing the holding ball number and displaying by the third symbol display device 81 A process of updating the display of the actual number of pending items to be displayed to the number corresponding to the command and a process of instructing display of a pending symbol to be displayed in the fusion pending number display area are executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 81, the holding ball number command reception process (S1730) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the contents of control processing of the holding ball number command reception processing (S1730).

  In the holding ball number command reception process (S1730 in FIG. 81), first, it is determined whether a common drawing holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1731). If it is determined that the regular drawing reservation ball number command has not been received, the processing of (S1733) is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the common drawing holding ball number command has been received (S1731: Yes), the holding ball number of the common drawing is extracted from the received command and the corresponding holding number is set to the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d. The value is stored (stored), and is updated by adding 1 to the value of the hold number counter 223 j. Here, the holding ball number counter 223 j is a counter for displaying the holding symbol in the fusion holding number display area Ds 6, and is configured to display the holding symbol corresponding to the value of the holding ball number counter 223 j.

  After the process of S1732, the process of S1733 is performed. In the process of S1733, it is determined whether a special figure holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1733). If it is determined that the special figure holding ball number command has not been received (S1733: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure holding ball number command has been received (S1733: Yes), the number of holding balls of the special figure (special symbol) is extracted from the received command and corresponds to the corresponding number of holding balls The value is stored in the special figure holding ball number counter 223 m (S1734). It is determined whether the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is a value larger than 0, that is, whether the holding ball of the special symbol is stored (S1735). If it is determined that the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is 0 (S1735: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is a value larger than 0 (S1735: Yes), the pseudo variation setting flag 223h is ON, that is, execution of the pseudo variation is already set It is determined whether it has been done (S1736). If the pseudo fluctuation setting flag 223h is set to ON (S1736: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation setting flag 223h is set to OFF (S1737), and the processing of S1738 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S1736: No), the processing of S1738 is executed.

  Here, when the special figure holding ball number command is received and it is newly stored from the state where there is no holding ball of the special symbol, if the setting of the pseudo fluctuation that has already been set, that setting It is configured to execute the process of releasing (corresponding to the process of S1737). Thereby, when the variation of the special symbol is started continuously, it is possible to suppress the problem that the pseudo variation is executed in the fusion symbol.

  In the process of S1738, it is determined whether it is during the fluctuation period of the special symbol (S1738). If it is determined that the special symbol is in the fluctuation period (S1738: Yes), whether the value of the hold number counter 223j is a value larger than 0, that is, the hold symbol is displayed in the fusion hold number display area Ds6 It is determined whether it is in the off state (S1739). When it is determined that the value of the number-of-holds counter 223 j is a value larger than 0 (S 1739: Yes), the fusion hold symbol corresponding to the special figure hold ball number counter 223 m The display of the symbol) is selected based on the lottery result stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k (S1740). Here, when a lottery result of a special symbol newly entered is a hit, the holding ball is easily changed to a holding symbol having a high degree of expectation such as red, and when it is a loss, the degree of expectation such as blue A lottery that is easily changed to a low holding symbol is executed. In addition, when the holding ball of a special symbol is memorize | stored, the color of the holding symbol currently displayed is variably displayed. On the other hand, when the value of the hold number counter 223j is 0 (S1739: No), the value of the hold number counter 223j is updated by adding 1 (S1741). Thereafter, the process of S1740 is performed. When the value of the number-of-holds counter 223j is 0, it is a case where the holding symbol is not displayed in the fusion holding number display area Ds6, the value of the number-of-holdings counter 223j is 1 The color of the reserved symbol to be newly displayed after being added is determined in the process of S1740. In the process of S1741, a display reserve number command indicating the value of the special view reserve number counter 223m and the value of the reserve number counter 223j is set. In addition, also in the process of S1749, the command for a display for changing and displaying a holding symbol is set.

  Referring back to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1712 that the common drawing fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1712: No), the process of S1731 is executed. In the process of S1731, it is determined whether a common figure or special figure prize information command has been received (S1731). If it is determined that a general drawing or special figure prize information command has been received (S1731: Yes), the information indicated by the received general drawing or special figure prize information command is a general drawing prize information storage area 223a, special figure prize information storage Each is stored in the area 223k (S1732). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the variable display setting process 2 (S1630) which is one process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the contents of control processing of the variation display setting processing 2 (S1630). The variation display setting process 2 (S1630) in the fourth embodiment is the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820) in the variation pattern selection process (S1803), as compared to the variation display setting process (FIG. 42, S1613) in the first embodiment. The first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the common drawing variation pattern selection process (S1805) is changed to the common drawing variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of S1801 that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1820). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820), a process of selecting a variation pattern of the fused symbol corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the contents of control processing of the variation pattern selection processing 2 (S1820). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820) in the fourth embodiment, the process from S1908 to S1911 is deleted from the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 43, S1802) in the first embodiment, and the time of pseudo variation start The difference is that the determination process (S1920) is added.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a pseudo change start determination process (S1920) which is one process in the second variation pattern selection process (S1820 in FIG. 83) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the contents of control processing of pseudo fluctuation start determination processing (S1920). In the pseudo variation start time determination process (S1920), after the variation is ended at the variation start timing of the special symbol, setting of whether or not to execute the pseudo variation in the fused symbol is executed.

  In the pseudo variation start time determination process (S1920), first, it is determined whether the success or failure determination result of the special symbol of the variation is out (S1921). If it is determined that the success or failure determination result is a hit (S1921: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the determination is out of step, it is determined whether the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is a value larger than 0 (S1922). When it is determined that the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is a value larger than 0 (S1922: Yes), the special figure fluctuation is continuously executed, and it is not necessary to execute the pseudo fluctuation, so the pseudo fluctuation This process ends without setting. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is 0 (S1922: No), whether the holding to be a hit is held within the 2 holding of the normal symbol or the common drawing prize information storage area 223a The determination is made based on the information in (S1923). When it is determined that the holding that is a hit is stored in the normal holding of 2 symbols (S1923: Yes), the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S1924). The fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation is set to a maximum of 30 seconds (S1925). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1923 that the hold that will be a hit is not stored within the 2 hold of the normal symbol (S1923: No), this process is ended.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the judgment result of the fluctuation start is out of the judgment, and in the state where the holding ball of the special symbol is not stored If the holding ball which becomes is stored, the processing which sets up the pseudo fluctuation of fusion design is executed after the end of the special figure fluctuation time which starts fluctuation. Therefore, even if it is the fluctuation of the fusion design where the judgment result of out is informed, the fluctuation of the regular design which becomes the next hitting ends, fluctuation of the fusion design does not stop fixed until the period when the hitting game is executed ends Since the pseudo fluctuation is continued, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the disconnection is informed, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is discouraged and the motivation for the game is lowered.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when there is a hit in the 2 suspension of a normal symbol, the pseudo variation is set, but 1 suspension may be sufficient, and 4 suspension etc. may be appropriately determined and set. Furthermore, when the holding ball of the special design is remembered, it was constituted not to set the pseudo fluctuation, but to set the fluctuation period of fusion design to synthesize with the fluctuation period of the special design which is held You may configure it. In such a case, when retention of a special symbol to be a hit is stored, by configuring so as to be easily synthesized, the degree of expectation for a hit can be increased as the variation period of the fused symbol is longer.

  Referring back to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. In the process of S1804, when the common drawing fluctuation start flag 223b is set to ON (S1804: Yes), the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1830). In the common pattern fluctuation pattern selection processing 2 (S1830), at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, processing is performed in which the fluctuation pattern of the fused symbol or the auxiliary symbol is selected corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 85, the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection processing 2 (S1830) which is one processing in the fluctuation display setting processing 2 (FIG. 82, S1630) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the contents of control processing of the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection processing 2 (S1830). In the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection processing 2 (S1830) in the fourth embodiment, each processing of S2021 to S2022 is added to the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection processing (FIG. 44, S1805) in the first embodiment. It differs in the point. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After executing the processing of S2005, it is determined whether or not the result of determination of acceptance of normal symbols that start changing is a hit (S2021). When it is determined that the success or failure judgment result of the normal symbol whose fluctuation starts is a hit (S2021: Yes), an opening notice is set corresponding to the spread map fluctuation time (S2022). The opening notice is set only when the special symbol is in motion and it is in the period in which the variation of the special symbol is executed (including the period in which the corresponding fused symbol is artificially changed). The release notice set here is a notice mode in which the player is notified of the launch of the game ball shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b).

  By configuring in this manner, when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fused symbol is scroll-displayed corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol, and it is difficult to discriminate the result of the normal symbol judgment. However, since the opening notice is executed 3 seconds before the hit of the normal symbol, it is possible to suppress the problem of losing the opportunity to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64a.

  Referring back to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. After the process of the variable display setting process 2 (S1630) is performed, the process of the pseudo change setting process 2 (S1640) is performed. In the pseudo variation setting process 2 (S1640), it is determined whether it is time to execute the pseudo variation, and the process of executing the display setting and the like of the pseudo variation is executed.

  Here, the pseudo fluctuation setting process 2 (S1640) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the contents of control processing of pseudo fluctuation setting processing 2. The pseudo variation setting process 2 (S1640) in the fourth embodiment is the first embodiment in that the processes of S2221 to S2222 are added to the pseudo variation setting process (FIG. 45, S1614) in the first embodiment. It is different from. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S2201, when the pseudo change flag 223c is off, that is, when the pseudo change is not executed in the fusion symbol (S2201: No), it is determined whether it is the stop timing of the special figure change of the out (S2221 ). If it is determined that it is not the stop timing of the out-of-focus special figure fluctuation (S2221: No), this process ends. It is determined whether the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223m is a value larger than 0 (S2222). If it is determined that the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is a value larger than 0 (S2222: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is 0 (S222: No), the processing of S2207 is executed.

  The processing of S2207 to S2213 has already been described in the first embodiment, but if it is determined whether or not to set the pseudo fluctuation and the condition for setting the pseudo fluctuation is met, the setting of the pseudo fluctuation is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the holding ball is also stored in the special symbol, and the variation corresponding to the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol in the fusion symbol is executed in one variation. did. As a result, even if the game is complicated, the player can easily play the game by watching the fusion symbol and playing a game.

  In addition, when the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, if there is a period in which the transition is changing until the next transition of the transition is started, then the movement of the transition is stopped. Since the pseudo-variation is executed in the period until it is done, it is possible to make the stop and the start of the fusion pattern continuous with good tempo.

  In addition, when the stop display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol is stored, if the hold to be hit is stored in the 2 hold of the normal symbol, the change of the hold to be hit is stopped and the hit game is hit If the fluctuation of the fused symbol is not fixed and stopped by the pseudo fluctuation until the period when the is executed is over, and if the ball enters the first entrance 64a further, the fused symbol is continuously continued until the period of the special figure fluctuation. Since the change is executed, it is possible to reduce the chance that the integrated symbol is stopped and displayed by the notification result indicating the disconnection, and it is possible to suppress the failure that lowers the player's will.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that a pseudo change might be performed at the time of a change stop of the fusion pattern corresponding to a change of a special symbol, a pseudo change is performed at the time of a change stop of a fusion pattern corresponding to a change of a normal pattern You may configure it.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined each one part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Feature A group> (displays a design that combines a common drawing and a special drawing)
A first determination unit that executes a first determination based on establishment of a first determination condition; and a second determination unit that executes a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition An assigning unit for assigning a specific period in which the second determination condition is easily established when the first determination result by the first determination unit is a specific determination result; and a second determination result by the second determination unit In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when the second judgment result is a specific, the first identification based on the establishment of the first judgment condition. In the case where the second determination condition is satisfied during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, display means on which information is dynamically displayed, based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means Notification to notify the selected information by the first identification information Gaming machine A1, wherein those having a control means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, is the state of the starting opening provided on the gaming board changed from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter? There is what performs the 1st lottery of no. In such a conventional type gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start winning for the starting opening, and a winning game advantageous to the player is executed when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery. In this type of gaming machine, a display device constituted by a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and whenever the second lottery is executed, the display device executes the variable display of the symbol indicating the result of the second lottery It is common. In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional game machines, depending on whether the game ball entered the starting opening in the first state or the second state, the symbol is executed based on the entered ball. What is aiming at interest improvement by changing the display mode of a fluctuation display is also proposed (for example, JP, 2012-147965, A).

  However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the variation display mode of the symbol indicating the result of the second lottery is merely changed according to whether or not the starting opening is entered in the second state, the first lottery The result of itself was displayed independently of the result of the second lottery. Therefore, since the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are separately displayed on the display device, it may be difficult to understand the results of each lottery during the game. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to easily play the game.

  According to the gaming machine A1, since the second determination result is also notified by the first identification information dynamically displayed based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the player pays attention to the first identification information to play the game. If done, it is possible to know the timing of establishment of the first determination condition and the second determination result, respectively, and it is possible to easily play the game.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the result of the first determination is a specific determination result, the first identification information indicates the first identification in a specific display mode based on the passage of a predetermined period. A game machine A2 having a first display control means for displaying a part of information.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, information based on the result of the first determination is displayed by the first identification information, so the player is notified of the first determination and the second based on the first identification information. There is an effect that the result of the determination can be reported together.

  The gaming machine A2 includes first period determining means for determining a first period based on the result of the first determination, and the predetermined period is the first period. Machine A3.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, after the specific display mode is displayed by the first identification information, if the second determination condition does not hold for a predetermined period even after the specific period has elapsed, the first identification A game machine A4 characterized in that dynamic display of information is stopped.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the advantageous effects of either the gaming machine A2 or A3, the first identification information is dynamically displayed for a long time, and an effect that the result of the next first determination can not be displayed can be suppressed. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a variable ball entry means that can be changed to a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state in which the ball entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first state And the second determination means is established based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and the giving means receives the variable ball entering means in the specific period. A game machine A5 characterized in that it is variable.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the first determination is a specific determination result, the variable ball entry means is varied to the first state. It is possible to set a period when it is easy to enter the ball into the variable ball entry means, there is a change in the game, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the first identification information is configured by combining and displaying a plurality of identification symbol rows, and is displayed in at least one symbol row among the plurality of identification symbol rows. The result of the first determination is informed by the information, and the result of the second determination is notified by another symbol row including the identification symbol row notified of the result of the first determination. Game machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a symbol row in which the first determination result and the second determination result are shared by the first identification information configured by a plurality of identification symbol rows. There is an effect that it is possible to inform by, and the symbol row can be reduced to make it easy to understand.

<Features B group> (structure to be awarded according to the popular figure)
It can be changed between a launch means capable of launching game balls, a first state in which the game balls launched by the launch means can enter and a second state in which entry of game balls is more difficult than in the first state. Variable ball entering means, first judging means for executing a first judgment on the basis of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and the first judgment by the first judgment means is a specific first 1) a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result; a second determining means for executing the second determination based on establishment of the determination condition; Variable control means for changing the variable entering means from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the second determination by the determining means is a specific second determination result, and the variable entering means Are also placed upstream, and after rolling the game ball for a specified period of time or more It said variable ball entrance means gaming machine, characterized in that those having a delay means for discharging the game balls in the direction disposed B1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, is the state of the starting opening provided on the gaming board changed from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter? There is what performs the 1st lottery of no. In such a conventional type gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start winning for the starting opening, and a winning game advantageous to the player is executed when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery. In this type of gaming machine, a display device constituted by a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and whenever the second lottery is executed, the display device executes the variable display of the symbol indicating the result of the second lottery It is common. In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional game machines, depending on whether the game ball entered the starting opening in the first state or the second state, the symbol is executed based on the entered ball. What is aiming at interest improvement by changing the display mode of a fluctuation display is also proposed (for example, JP, 2012-147965, A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if the state of the starting opening is changed to the second state based on the first lottery, the gaming ball reaches the starting opening in a timely manner during the second state. If not, the second lottery was not executed. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the starting opening when the starting opening is in the second state while the player is not firing the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine B1, since the gaming ball is rolled after the specific period for a specified period or more upstream of the variable ball entering means by the delay means, the variable ball entering means is discharged during the period when the game ball is not fired by the firing means. Even in the first state, there is an effect that the gaming ball can easily enter the variable ball entry means.

  The gaming machine B1 has a specific area through which the gaming ball can pass, and detection means capable of detecting that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area, and based on the detection by the gaming ball by the detection means A game machine B2 characterized in that the determination condition is satisfied;

  In addition to the effects played by the game machine B1, the determination condition is satisfied by the game machine B2 passing the specific area, so that the player can be interested in the rolling of the game ball according to the game machine B2 It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine B2, the delay means includes a ball entering portion where the game ball can enter, a flowing-down speed reducing portion which reduces the flow-down speed of the gaming ball entering the ball, and a flowing-down speed reducing portion The delay means has at least a discharge part from which game balls are discharged to the outside, and the ball entry part is disposed at a position where the game balls having passed through the specific area are easily induced. Feature game machine B3.

  In the gaming machine B3, the gaming ball decelerating portion at least includes a rolling path along which the gaming ball rolls in a spiral manner.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the gaming ball decelerating portion is characterized by at least having a bowl-shaped rolling path along which the gaming ball rolls in a circumferential manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, after dynamically displaying display means for displaying identification information based on the result of the second determination based on the second determination condition and the identification information displayed on the display means And dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the second determination, wherein the variable control means is configured to perform the identification based on the specific second determination result by the dynamic display means. The variable entering means is changed from the second state to the first state when the information is stopped and displayed, and the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means during the specific period. A game machine B6 characterized in that the period is shorter than the dynamic display period.

  In the gaming machine B6, the specific period is constituted by a period obtained by subtracting a period required for the game ball discharged from the delay means to enter the variable ball entry means from the dynamic display period. A game machine B7 characterized by being.

<Feature C group> (simulated change after special map change according to the start of common map change)
Based on satisfaction of the first acquisition condition, acquisition means for acquiring information, storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of the information acquired by the acquisition means, and establishment of the first determination condition Based on the information stored in the storage means, the first determination means performing the first determination, and the first effect is determined if the first determination is performed by the first determination means When the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination and the first display means indicate that the first determination is a specific result after execution in the effect period, the game ball is turned on A second determination means for executing a second determination and a second determination by the second determination means are executed based on the ball entering means for facilitating the ball and the game ball entering the ball for the ball entering means If the second effect is performed in the second effect period, The second display means for displaying the result of the second determination and the bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the second display means indicates that the second determination is a specific result In the gaming machine having the bonus game execution means, the correction means corrects the difference between the end timing of the second effect period and the start timing of the first effect period to be smaller when the specific condition is satisfied. A game machine C1 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine C1, the difference between the end timing of the second effect period and the start timing of the first effect period is corrected so that the first effect and the second effect are easily performed alternately. The trouble that the player gets bored with the game by enjoying the mutual effect can be suppressed. Furthermore, since it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the ball entering means when the first determination is a specific determination result, the relationship between the end timing of the first effect period and the start timing of the second effect period increases. There is an effect that it is possible to execute the effect more alternately.

  In the gaming machine C1, from the second effect period determining means for determining the second effect period based on the execution of the second determination, and from the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means The duplication determining means determines whether the first effect is executed over a period or based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the correction means is configured to perform the first effect over the period by the overlapping determining means. The game machine C2 executes the correction when it is determined that the game is to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the correction is executed only when there is a difference from the execution start of the first effect, so the start timing of the first effect and the end timing of the second effect can be brought closer to each other. is there.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, prior to the determination result determined by the first determination means being determined in advance before the first determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is established. In the case where it is determined in advance that the specific determination result is determined by the determination means and the a priori first determination means, the above-mentioned first to third effects based on the first determination on the information are executed until the end of the first effect 2) A game machine C3 having an extension means for extending a rendering period.

  According to the gaming machine C3, since the second effect is extended to the next time the game ball enters the ball entry means, the interval at which the second effect is continuously executed becomes short, and the player is early It is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored.

  A game machine C4 according to any one of the game machines C2 and C3, wherein the overlap judging means carries out the judgment with the execution start timing of the second effect as the establishment of the predetermined condition.

  In the gaming machine C4, since the second effect period can be determined in advance in accordance with the execution start timing of the first effect at the execution start timing of the second effect, there is an effect that control can be easily performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the duplication determining means executes the determination by setting that the predetermined condition has become a predetermined period after the start of the second effect period. A gaming machine C5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C5, the end timing of the second effect can be matched with the start timing of the first effect during the second effect period, so that the first effect is executed after the second effect is started Also has the effect of being able to make corrections.

<Feature D group> (Normally look at the judgment result of the symbol and execute the pseudo change after the special view change)
Based on satisfaction of the first acquisition condition, acquisition means for acquiring information, storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of the information acquired by the acquisition means, and establishment of the first determination condition Based on the information stored in the storage means, the first determination means performing the first determination, and the first effect is determined if the first determination is performed by the first determination means When the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination and the first display means indicate that the first determination is a specific result after execution in the effect period, the game ball is turned on A second determination means for executing a second determination and a second determination by the second determination means are executed based on the ball entering means for facilitating the ball and the game ball entering the ball for the ball entering means If the second effect is performed in the second effect period, The second display means for displaying the result of the second determination and the bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the second display means indicates that the second determination is a specific result In the gaming machine having the bonus game execution means, the determination result determined by the first determination means based on the information stored in the storage means before the first determination condition is satisfied. It is characterized by comprising: prior discrimination means for discriminating in advance; and variable setting means for variably setting the second effect period based on the discrimination result discriminated by the preliminary discrimination means. Gaming machine D1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, is the state of the starting opening provided on the gaming board changed from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter? There is what performs the 1st lottery of no. In such a conventional type gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start winning for the starting opening, and a winning game advantageous to the player is executed when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery. In this type of gaming machine, a display device constituted by a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and whenever the second lottery is executed, the display device executes the variable display of the symbol indicating the result of the second lottery It is common. In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional game machines, depending on whether the game ball entered the starting opening in the first state or the second state, the symbol is executed based on the entered ball. What is aiming at interest improvement by changing the display mode of a fluctuation display is also proposed (for example, JP, 2012-147965, A).

  However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the variation display mode of the symbol indicating the result of the second lottery is merely changed according to whether or not the starting opening is entered in the second state, the first lottery The result of itself was displayed independently of the result of the second lottery. Therefore, since the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are displayed separately and independently on the display device, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the relevance between the first lottery and the second lottery.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the determination result of the first determination is determined in advance, and the second effect period is varied. Therefore, according to the determination result of the first determination to be executed after the start of the second effect. The second effect period can be varied, and the first effect and the second effect can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  The gaming machine D1 includes first effect period determination means for determining one effect period from the plurality of periods when the first determination is performed, and the variable setting means is configured to When it is determined by the pre-article determination means that the first determination results in a specific result, the first effect is continued so that at least the first effect period corresponding to the determined first determination ends. A game machine D2 characterized in that the second effect period of the second effect being executed or executed is variably set based on the longest period which can be determined by the period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, since the second effect period continues at least until the end of the first effect in which the next first determination results in a specific determination result, the second effect is continuously performed on the player in a short period of time There is an effect that it is easy to be done and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the second determination is the specific determination result, the variable setting means has a prohibiting means for prohibiting the second effect period from being varied. A game machine D3 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the second determination is a specific determination result, the second effect period is not varied by the prohibiting means, so execution of a bonus game is performed There is an effect that it can control that start timing is changed.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, a game machine characterized in that the first effect and the second effect are executed at least by dynamically displaying a common effect pattern on a display means. D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first effect and the second effect are executed by dynamically displaying a common effect pattern. There is an effect that the 1 effect and the second effect can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature E group> (informing a big hit judgment by a common drawing fluctuation and a special drawing fluctuation)
Based on satisfaction of the first acquisition condition, acquisition means for acquiring information, storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of the information acquired by the acquisition means, and establishment of the first determination condition Based on the information stored in the storage means, the first determination means performing the first determination, and when the first determination is performed by the first determination means, the result of the first determination A first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on the first game, a ball entering means for facilitating the game ball to enter when the first determination is a specific result, and the game ball to the ball entering means Based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, the second judgment means that executes the second judgment, and the second judgment by the second judgment means executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the second judgment is a specific judgment result Bonus game executing means, and the second judging means Gaming machine E1, characterized in that if the constant is performed, those having a continuous demonstration execution means for executing a continuous production which is based on the result of continued second determination the first effect.

  According to the gaming machine E1, since the results of the first determination and the second determination are executed with continued effects, it is possible to make the player see the two determinations as if they were the result of one determination. effective.

  In the gaming machine E1, the first effect executed based on the fact that the first determination is a specific result is continuously performed at least continuously during a period in which the ball entering means is easy to enter the ball. A game machine E2 characterized by being

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1, since the first effect is continuously executed during a period in which the ball means is easy to enter the ball, the game ball enters the ball entering means There is an effect that it is easy to continue the continuous effect performed when the second determination is performed.

  The gaming machine E1 or E2 has display means for dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol rows as the first effect, and the first effect execution means determines the plurality of symbol rows based on the result of the first determination. Among the above, at least two of them are stopped by a combination indicating the result of the first determination, and the continuous effect execution means is configured to stop the second pattern row other than the symbol row stopped by the first effect execution means. A gaming machine E3 characterized by stopping in a combination of symbols associated with a combination of symbols stopped by the first effect execution means in the previous period based on the result of the determination.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, a plurality of symbols can be combined and the first determination and the second determination can be notified in order, respectively. Also has the effect of being able to simplify and notify.

  A game machine E4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the ball entering means can not enter the ball other than the period in which the ball entering is easy.

  According to the gaming machine E4, since the second determination is not performed except when the first determination results in a specific determination in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the second determination is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easy to understand the timing of

<Feature F group> (game characteristics)
A first determination unit that executes determination in which a determination probability that is a specific first determination result is set to the first probability based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the first determination by the first determination unit When it is determined that the result is a ball entering means in which a period during which game ball entry is facilitated is set and the game ball enters the ball entering means, a determination that results in a specific second determination result A second determination means for executing a determination in which the probability is set to the second probability and a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the second determination means determines that the second determination result is the specific second determination result A game machine F1 characterized by having a bonus game execution means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since it is possible to set the probability that the bonus game is executed by combining the first determination probability and the second determination probability, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game.

  In the gaming machine F1, if it is determined that the second determination means is a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, an area in which the game ball can be entered and the area enter And the special game execution means is configured to execute the special game based on the passage of the special game ball in the specific area. The game machine F2 to do.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, a special second determination result is obtained even when it is not determined to be a specific second determination result, so that the game ball can pass through the specific area The game has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine F2, a probability that it is determined that the special second determination result is set to be higher than the second probability is a gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F2, the frequency at which it is determined that the special second determination result is high, and the player is made to execute the game to try to enter the specific area and get bored Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, a variable member that can be changed to a first state in which gaming balls having entered the area can pass to the specific area, and a second state in which passing is more difficult than the first state And a variable control means for changing the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to vary between the state where it can pass to the specific area and the difficult state. There is an effect that it can control.

  The gaming machine F4 includes timing determination means for determining a timing at which the game ball can enter the area based on the determination made by the second determination means as the special second determination result, A game machine F5 characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at a predetermined timing determined in advance based on the fact that the special second determination result is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, it is possible to vary whether or not the gaming ball can pass to the specific area by the timing determined by the timing determination means. Has the effect of being able to control the rate of passing the

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a first ball entry

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 stores up to a predetermined number of acquisition means for acquiring information based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. Storage means capable of performing the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the first determination means performing the first determination When the first determination is performed, the first determination is specified by the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination after performing the first effect in the first effect period, and the first display means The second determination is performed based on the ball entering means which makes it easy to enter the game ball when it is displayed that the result of the first judgment is 1, and that the game ball entered the ball entering means. a second determination means able to pair their second determination means A was directed, after performing the second effect at a predetermined period, a second display unit capable of displaying the results of the second determination, the second determination is given by its second display means 2 determines if it is displayed is the result has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player, wherein the first against the information stored before Symbol storage means before the determination condition is satisfied, the specified by the first and pre-first-size constant means capable of determine the constant advance a determination result determined by the determination means, the pre-first-size constant means It is determined in advance that it is determined that the first-size constant results in, is executed first after the presentation termination based on the specific first determination result corresponding to the information that has been determined by the pre-first judging means let varied based period of the second effect in a predetermined condition And the step, and has a.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the ball entering means is operated based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established after the ball entering the state is facilitated. It is what makes it difficult to enter the ball than the easy state .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to store up to a predetermined number of acquiring means for acquiring information and the information acquired by the acquiring means based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition. Storage means; first determination means for performing a first determination based on information stored in the storage means based on establishment of a first determination condition; and the first determination being performed by the first determination means And the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination after the first effect is executed in the first effect period, and the first determination result of the first determination being specified by the first display means if it is displayed is, the ball entrance means inlet ball game ball is facilitated, based on the game ball has ball entrance to the ball entrance means, capable of performing a second determination a second judging means, an effect corresponding to the second determination means After performing the second effect in a predetermined time period that includes a second display unit capable of displaying the results of said second determination is a second judgment result and the second determination is specific by its second display means than but when it is displayed, it has a benefits game execution means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player, wherein the first determination condition is established against the information stored before Symbol storage means even before, and pre-first-size constant means capable of pre-determine the constant a determination result determined by said first determining means, first-size constant result of the specified by the pre-first-size constant means When it is determined that the determination in advance, the pre said period of the second effect of the executed after the end of the first effect based on a particular first determination result corresponding to the information determined by the first determination means a variable causing means based on a predetermined condition, even with a It is. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, after the ball entering means is in the easy state of ball entering, the ball entering is made more difficult than the state in which ball entering is easy based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. . Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, is the state of the starting opening provided on the gaming board changed from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter? There is what performs the 1st lottery of no. In such a conventional type gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on the start winning for the starting opening, and a winning game advantageous to the player is executed when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery. As a result, attention is paid to both the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery, and the interest of the player is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).
However, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.
The present technical idea is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 stores up to a predetermined number of acquisition means for acquiring information and the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition. Storage means capable of performing the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the first determination means performing the first determination When the first determination is performed, the first determination is specified by the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination after performing the first effect in the first effect period, and the first display means The second determination is performed based on the ball entering means which makes it easy to enter the game ball when it is displayed as a result of the game, and that the game ball entered the ball entering means. A second determination is performed by the determination means and the second determination means In this case, after the second effect is executed in the second effect period, the second display means for displaying the result of the second determination and the display that the second determination is a specific result by the second display means And a bonus game execution unit for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player, and based on the information stored in the storage unit before the first determination condition is established. A predetermining means for determining in advance the determination result determined by the first determining means, and a variable setting for variably setting the second effect period based on the determination result determined by the predetermining means And means.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, when the first determination is executed, the first effecting period is determined based on a plurality of time periods. When the effect setting period determining means is included, and the variable setting means determines that the first determination results in a specific result by the prior determination means, the first effect corresponding to the determined first determination The second effect period of the second effect being executed or executed is variably set based on the longest period that can be determined by the first effect period determining means so as to continue until at least the period ends. It is.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, when the second determination is the specific determination result, the second effect period is variable by the variable setting means. Have prohibited means to prohibit being done.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to store up to a predetermined number of acquiring means for acquiring information and the information acquired by the acquiring means based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition. Storage means, a first determination means for performing a first determination based on information stored in the storage means based on establishment of a first determination condition, and the first determination by the first determination means When executed, after the first effect is executed in the first effect period, the first determination means displays the result of the first determination, and the first determination is a specific result by the first display means A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the ball entering means for facilitating the game ball to enter when the game ball is displayed, and based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; When the second determination by the second determination means is performed, the second In the case where the second display means for displaying the result of the second determination and the second display means indicate that the second determination is a specific result after the second effect is performed in the second effect period, The first determination based on the information stored in the storage unit before the first determination condition is established, the bonus game execution unit configured to execute a bonus game that is advantageous to the player; It has a prior determination means for determining in advance the determination result determined by the means, and a variable setting means for variably setting the second effect period based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means. It is a thing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the first determination is performed, the first effect period includes a first effect period determining unit that determines an effect period of 1 based on a plurality of periods, and the variable setting unit determines the advance determination The first effect period determining means is configured to continue until at least the first effect period corresponding to the determined first determination is ended when it is determined by the means that the first determination results in a specific result. The second effect period of the second effect being executed or to be executed is variably set based on the longest period which can be determined by the above. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, in the case where the second determination is the specific determination result, the variable setting means is configured to inhibit the second effect period from being varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 stores up to a predetermined number of acquisition means for acquiring information based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. Storage means capable of performing the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the first determination means performing the first determination When the first determination is performed, the first determination is specified by the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination after performing the first effect in the first effect period, and the first display means The second determination is performed based on the ball entering means which makes it easy to enter the game ball when it is displayed that the result of the first judgment is 1, and that the game ball entered the ball entering means. And a second judging means capable of A second display means capable of displaying the result of the second determination after executing the second effect for a predetermined period, and the second (2) a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when it is displayed that the judgment result is the first judgment condition for the information stored in the memory means The first predetermined determination result by the first prior determination means, and the first prior determination means capable of determining in advance the determination result determined by the first determination means before the establishment of Period of the second effect to be executed after the end of the first effect based on the specific first determination result corresponding to the information determined by the a priori first determining means. It is varied based on a predetermined condition And varying means, the period in which the pre-second effect to be executed after completion of the first effect based on the specific first determination result corresponding to the information determined by the first determination means is executed, The game entering means has effect setting means capable of setting a new effect corresponding to the entering ball based on the game ball entering the ball, and the first effect is a result of the first determination. The identification information capable of indicating a dynamic display, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started after the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed; (1) It is configured to be executable until the identification information is stopped and displayed in one effect.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to store up to a predetermined number of acquiring means for acquiring information and the information acquired by the acquiring means based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition. Storage means; first determination means for performing a first determination based on information stored in the storage means based on establishment of a first determination condition; and the first determination being performed by the first determination means And the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination after the first effect is executed in the first effect period, and the first determination result of the first determination being specified by the first display means If it is displayed, the second determination can be performed based on the ball entering means that facilitates the game ball to enter the ball and the fact that the game ball enters the ball entering means. It is an effect corresponding to the second judging means and the second judging means A second display means capable of displaying the result of the second determination after executing the second effect in a predetermined period, and the second determination being a specific second determination result by the second display means And a bonus game execution unit for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the symbol is displayed, and before the first determination condition for the information stored in the storage unit is satisfied. And a priori first determination means capable of determining in advance the determination result determined by the first determination means, and a priori determination that the specific first determination result is determined by the prior first determination means Based on a predetermined condition, the period of the second effect to be executed after the end of the first effect based on the specific first determination result corresponding to the information determined by the prior first determining means. and varying means for varying, before article In the period during which the second effect is executed after the end of the first effect based on the specific first determination result corresponding to the information determined by the first determination means, the game ball enters the ball entering means And an effect setting means capable of setting a new effect corresponding to the entering ball based on the entering of the ball, and the first effect is an identification capable of indicating the result of the first determination The information is configured to be dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started after the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is configured to be executable before it is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, after the ball entering means is in the easy state of ball entering, the ball entering is made more difficult than the state in which ball entering is easy based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. . Therefore, it is effective in the ability to suppress the malfunction which enters into ball entering means excessively .

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a 1st ball entrance (ball entry means)
81 3rd symbol display device (1st display means, 2nd display means)
203b storage means
S304 second judging means
S512 first determination means
S606 acquisition means
S 607 prior first judging means
S1004 bonus game execution means
Part of S2209 variable means

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 stores up to a predetermined number of acquisition means for acquiring information based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. Storage means capable of performing the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the first determination means performing the first determination when the first determination has been performed, after performing the first effect in the first effect period, a first display control means capable of displaying the mode indicating the result of the first determination on the display means, before When the display means displays an aspect indicating that the first determination is a specific first determination result, the ball entering means for facilitating the ball entry of the gaming ball, and the game ball for the ball entering means It is possible to execute the second judgment based on entering the ball A second judging means, after performing the second production which embodiments for indicating the result of the second determination means is displayed on said display means for a period of up to be displayed on said display means, said second determination a second display control means capable of causing display on the display unit embodiment for showing the results of the previous SL mode indicating that the second determination is a specific second determination result is displayed on the display means The bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player after the game, and the first determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied, It is determined in advance that the first prior determination means capable of determining in advance the determination result determined by the first determination means, and that the first prior determination means determines that the first determination result is the specific first determination result , Determined by the prior first determining means The possible be terminated on the basis that the ball entrance to the entering sphere means the second effect that is performed after the period of the first effect based on a particular first judgment result ended ended corresponding to the information Means, and a period during which the second effect to be executed after the end of the first effect based on the specific first determination result corresponding to the information determined by the preliminary first determining means is being executed. The game ball has effect setting means capable of setting a new effect corresponding to the game ball based on the game ball entering the ball, and the first game is a result of the first judgment. The identification information capable of indicating a dynamic display, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started after the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed; 1 Possible to execute until the identification information is stopped and displayed in one effect It is configured.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to store up to a predetermined number of acquiring means for acquiring information and the information acquired by the acquiring means based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition. Storage means; first determination means for performing a first determination based on information stored in the storage means based on establishment of a first determination condition; and the first determination being performed by the first determination means If it is, after performing the first effect in the first effect period, a first display control means capable of displaying the mode indicating the result of the first determination on the display means, the previous SL first determination A ball entering means that makes it easy to enter the game ball when the display means displays an aspect indicating that the first determination result is a specific result, and that the game ball enters the ball entering means Based on the second judging means capable of executing the second judgment and After performing the second production which embodiments for indicating the result of the second determination means is displayed on said display means for a period of up to be displayed on said display means, mode for indicating the result of the second determination after the mode shown in that said second display control means capable of causing the display unit, the previous SL second determination is a specific second determination result is displayed on the display means, the player It is determined by the first determination means prior to establishment of the first determination condition for the information stored in the storage means. Determined in advance by the first prior determination means capable of determining in advance the determination result, and the first prior determination means determines that the specific first determination result is determined, and the first prior determination Correspond to the information determined by the means An end section which can be terminated on the basis that the ball entrance of the second effect in the entering sphere means to be executed after the period of the first effect based on the specific first determination result has been completed, before Article In the period during which the second effect is executed after the end of the first effect based on the specific first determination result corresponding to the information determined by the previous first determination means, It has effect setting means capable of setting a new effect corresponding to the ball based on the ball having entered the ball, and the first effect can indicate the result of the first determination Unique identification information is configured to be displayed dynamically, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started after the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed. Something that is configured to be executable before the information is stopped and displayed It is. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a 1st ball entrance (ball entry means)
81 3rd symbol display device ( display means )
203b storage means S304 second determination means S512 first determination means S606 acquisition means S607 prior first determination means S1004 bonus game execution means S2209 part of variable means

Claims (3)

Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition;
Storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of the information acquired by the acquisition means;
A first determination unit that executes a first determination based on information stored in the storage unit based on establishment of a first determination condition;
First display means for displaying a result of the first determination after performing the first effect in a first effect period when the first determination is performed by the first determination means;
A ball entering means that facilitates the game ball to enter when the first display means indicates that the first determination is a specific result;
Second determination means for performing a second determination based on the game ball entering the ball entering means;
Second display means for displaying the result of the second determination after performing the second effect in the second effect period when the second determination by the second determination means is performed;
A gaming machine comprising: bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when the second display means indicates that the second determination is a specific result.
Prior determination means for determining in advance the determination result determined by the first determination means based on the information stored in the storage means before the first determination condition is established;
A game machine comprising: variable setting means for variably setting the second effect period based on the judgment result judged by the pre-article judgment means. It has a first effect period determination means for determining one effect period from the plurality of periods when the first determination is executed,
The variable setting unit continues, when it is determined by the prior determination unit that the first determination results in a specific result, until at least a first effect period corresponding to the determined first determination ends. As described above, the second effect period of the second effect being executed or executed is variably set based on the longest period which can be determined by the first effect period determining means. The gaming machine according to Item 1.   The apparatus according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising prohibiting means for prohibiting the second effect period from being varied by the variable setting means when the second determination is the specific determination result. 2 game machines described.

Images